VirtualBox

source: vbox/trunk/doc/manual/en_US/user_VBoxManage.xml@ 77888

Last change on this file since 77888 was 77883, checked in by vboxsync, 6 years ago

bugref:9404. Added two new commands for VBoxManage - one displays the list of cloud machine instances, second displays the list of cloud images. The generated documentation uses new style.

  • Property svn:eol-style set to native
  • Property svn:keywords set to Id Revision
File size: 299.5 KB
Line 
1<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
2<!--
3 user_VBoxManage.xml:
4 VBoxManage documentation for the user manual.
5
6 This XML document is also be used for generating the help text
7 built into VBoxManage as well as manpages (hacking in progress).
8
9 Copyright (C) 2006-2018 Oracle Corporation
10
11 This file is part of VirtualBox Open Source Edition (OSE), as
12 available from http://www.virtualbox.org. This file is free software;
13 you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU
14 General Public License (GPL) as published by the Free Software
15 Foundation, in version 2 as it comes in the "COPYING" file of the
16 VirtualBox OSE distribution. VirtualBox OSE is distributed in the
17 hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY of any kind.
18 -->
19<!DOCTYPE chapter PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.5//EN"
20 "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.5/docbookx.dtd"[
21<!ENTITY % all.entities SYSTEM "all-entities.ent">
22%all.entities;
23]>
24<chapter id="vboxmanage">
25
26 <title>VBoxManage</title>
27
28 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-intro">
29
30 <title>Introduction</title>
31
32 <para>
33 As briefly mentioned in <xref linkend="frontends" />,
34 <command>VBoxManage</command> is the command-line interface to
35 &product-name;. With it, you can completely control &product-name;
36 from the command line of your host operating system.
37 <command>VBoxManage</command> supports all the features that the
38 graphical user interface gives you access to, but it supports a
39 lot more than that. It exposes all the features of the
40 virtualization engine, even those that cannot be accessed from the
41 GUI.
42 </para>
43
44 <para>
45 You will need to use the command line if you want to do the
46 following:
47 </para>
48
49 <itemizedlist>
50
51 <listitem>
52 <para>
53 Use a different user interface than the main GUI such as the
54 VBoxHeadless server.
55 </para>
56 </listitem>
57
58 <listitem>
59 <para>
60 Control some of the more advanced and experimental
61 configuration settings for a VM.
62 </para>
63 </listitem>
64
65 </itemizedlist>
66
67 <para>
68 There are two main things to keep in mind when using
69 <command>VBoxManage</command>. First,
70 <command>VBoxManage</command> must always be used with a specific
71 subcommand, such as <command>list</command> or
72 <command>createvm</command> or <command>startvm</command>. All the
73 subcommands that <command>VBoxManage</command> supports are
74 described in detail in <xref linkend="vboxmanage" />.
75 </para>
76
77 <para>
78 Second, most of these subcommands require that you specify a
79 particular virtual machine after the subcommand. There are two
80 ways you can do this:
81 </para>
82
83 <itemizedlist>
84
85 <listitem>
86 <para>
87 You can specify the VM name, as it is shown in the
88 &product-name; GUI. Note that if that name contains spaces,
89 then you must enclose the entire name in double quotes. This
90 is always required with command line arguments that contain
91 spaces. For example:
92 </para>
93
94<screen>VBoxManage startvm "Windows XP"</screen>
95 </listitem>
96
97 <listitem>
98 <para>
99 You can specify the UUID, which is the internal unique
100 identifier that &product-name; uses to refer to the virtual
101 machine. Assuming that the VM called "Windows XP" has the UUID
102 shown below, the following command has the same effect as the
103 previous example:
104 </para>
105
106<screen>VBoxManage startvm 670e746d-abea-4ba6-ad02-2a3b043810a5</screen>
107 </listitem>
108
109 </itemizedlist>
110
111 <para>
112 You can enter <command>VBoxManage list vms</command> to have all
113 currently registered VMs listed with all their settings, including
114 their respective names and UUIDs.
115 </para>
116
117 <para>
118 Some typical examples of how to control &product-name; from the
119 command line are listed below:
120 </para>
121
122 <itemizedlist>
123
124 <listitem>
125 <para>
126 To create a new virtual machine from the command line and
127 immediately register it with &product-name;, use
128 <command>VBoxManage createvm</command> with the
129 <option>--register</option> option, as follows:
130 </para>
131
132<screen>$ VBoxManage createvm --name "SUSE 10.2" --register
133VirtualBox Command Line Management Interface Version <replaceable>version-number</replaceable>
134(C) 2005-2018 Oracle Corporation
135All rights reserved.
136
137Virtual machine 'SUSE 10.2' is created.
138UUID: c89fc351-8ec6-4f02-a048-57f4d25288e5
139Settings file: '/home/username/.config/VirtualBox/Machines/SUSE 10.2/SUSE 10.2.xml'</screen>
140
141 <para>
142 As can be seen from the above output, a new virtual machine
143 has been created with a new UUID and a new XML settings file.
144 </para>
145
146 <para>
147 For more details, see
148 <xref
149 linkend="vboxmanage-createvm" />.
150 </para>
151 </listitem>
152
153 <listitem>
154 <para>
155 To show the configuration of a particular VM, use
156 <command>VBoxManage showvminfo</command>. See
157 <xref
158 linkend="vboxmanage-showvminfo" /> for details
159 and an example.
160 </para>
161 </listitem>
162
163 <listitem>
164 <para>
165 To change settings while a VM is powered off, use
166 <command>VBoxManage modifyvm</command>. For example:
167 </para>
168
169<screen>VBoxManage modifyvm "Windows XP" --memory 512</screen>
170
171 <para>
172 See also <xref linkend="vboxmanage-modifyvm" />.
173 </para>
174 </listitem>
175
176 <listitem>
177 <para>
178 To change the storage configuration, such as to add a storage
179 controller and then a virtual disk, use <command>VBoxManage
180 storagectl</command> and <command>VBoxManage
181 storageattach</command>. See
182 <xref
183 linkend="vboxmanage-storagectl" /> and
184 <xref
185 linkend="vboxmanage-storageattach" />.
186 </para>
187 </listitem>
188
189 <listitem>
190 <para>
191 To control VM operation, use one of the following:
192 </para>
193
194 <itemizedlist>
195
196 <listitem>
197 <para>
198 To start a VM that is currently powered off, use
199 <command>VBoxManage startvm</command>. See
200 <xref
201 linkend="vboxmanage-startvm" />.
202 </para>
203 </listitem>
204
205 <listitem>
206 <para>
207 To pause or save a VM that is currently running or change
208 some of its settings, use <command>VBoxManage
209 controlvm</command>. See
210 <xref
211 linkend="vboxmanage-controlvm" />.
212 </para>
213 </listitem>
214
215 </itemizedlist>
216 </listitem>
217
218 </itemizedlist>
219
220 </sect1>
221
222 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-cmd-overview">
223
224 <title>Commands Overview</title>
225
226 <para>
227 When running <command>VBoxManage</command> without parameters or
228 when supplying an invalid command line, the following command
229 syntax list is shown. Note that the output will be slightly
230 different depending on the host platform. If in doubt, check the
231 output of <command>VBoxManage</command> for the commands available
232 on your particular host.
233 </para>
234
235 <xi:include href="user_VBoxManage_CommandsOverview.xml" xpointer="xpointer(/sect1/*)"
236 xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" />
237
238 <para>
239 Each time <command>VBoxManage</command> is invoked, only one
240 command can be executed. However, a command might support several
241 subcommands which then can be invoked in one single call. The
242 following sections provide detailed reference information on the
243 different commands.
244 </para>
245
246 </sect1>
247
248 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-general">
249
250 <title>General Options</title>
251
252 <itemizedlist>
253
254 <listitem>
255 <para>
256 <computeroutput>-v|--version</computeroutput>: Show the
257 version of this tool and exit.
258 </para>
259 </listitem>
260
261 <listitem>
262 <para>
263 <computeroutput>--nologo</computeroutput>: Suppress the output
264 of the logo information. This option is useful for scripts.
265 </para>
266 </listitem>
267
268 <listitem>
269 <para>
270 <computeroutput>--settingspw</computeroutput>: Specifiy a
271 settings password.
272 </para>
273 </listitem>
274
275 <listitem>
276 <para>
277 <computeroutput>--settingspwfile</computeroutput>: Specify a
278 file containing the settings password.
279 </para>
280 </listitem>
281
282 </itemizedlist>
283
284 <para>
285 The settings password is used for certain settings which need to
286 be stored in encrypted form for security reasons. At the moment,
287 the only encrypted setting is the iSCSI initiator secret, see
288 <xref linkend="vboxmanage-storageattach" />. As long as no
289 settings password is specified, this information is stored in
290 <emphasis>plain text</emphasis>. After using the
291 <computeroutput>--settingspw|--settingspwfile</computeroutput>
292 option once, it must be always used. Otherwise, the encrypted
293 setting cannot be unencrypted.
294 </para>
295
296 </sect1>
297
298 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-list">
299
300 <title>VBoxManage list</title>
301
302 <para>
303 The <command>list</command> command gives relevant information
304 about your system and information about &product-name;'s current
305 settings.
306 </para>
307
308 <para>
309 The following subcommands are available with <command>VBoxManage
310 list</command>:
311 </para>
312
313 <itemizedlist>
314
315 <listitem>
316 <para>
317 <command>vms</command>: Lists all virtual machines currently
318 registered with &product-name;. By default this displays a
319 compact list with each VM's name and UUID. If you also specify
320 <computeroutput>--long</computeroutput> or
321 <computeroutput>-l</computeroutput>, this will be a detailed
322 list as with the <command>showvminfo</command> command, see
323 <xref linkend="vboxmanage-showvminfo"/>.
324 </para>
325 </listitem>
326
327 <listitem>
328 <para>
329 <command>runningvms</command>: Lists all currently running
330 virtual machines by their unique identifiers (UUIDs) in the
331 same format as with <command>vms</command>.
332 </para>
333 </listitem>
334
335 <listitem>
336 <para>
337 <command>ostypes</command>: Lists all guest operating systems
338 presently known to &product-name;, along with the identifiers
339 used to refer to them with the <command>modifyvm</command>
340 command.
341 </para>
342 </listitem>
343
344 <listitem>
345 <para>
346 <command>hostdvds</command>, <command>hostfloppies</command>:
347 Lists the DVD, floppy, bridged networking, and host-only
348 networking interfaces on the host, along with the name used to
349 access them from within &product-name;.
350 </para>
351 </listitem>
352
353 <listitem>
354 <para>
355 <command>intnets</command>: Displays information about the
356 internal networks.
357 </para>
358 </listitem>
359
360 <listitem>
361 <para>
362 <command>bridgedifs</command>, <command>hostonlyifs</command>,
363 <command>natnets</command>, <command>dhcpservers</command>:
364 Lists the bridged network interfaces, host-only network
365 interfaces, NAT network interfaces, and DHCP servers currently
366 available on the host. See
367 <xref linkend="networkingdetails" />.
368 </para>
369 </listitem>
370
371 <listitem>
372 <para>
373 <command>hostinfo</command>: Displays information about the
374 host system, such as CPUs, memory size, and operating system
375 version.
376 </para>
377 </listitem>
378
379 <listitem>
380 <para>
381 <command>hostcpuids</command>: Lists the CPUID parameters for
382 the host CPUs. This can be used for a more fine grained
383 analyis of the host's virtualization capabilities.
384 </para>
385 </listitem>
386
387 <listitem>
388 <para>
389 <command>hddbackends</command>: Lists all known virtual disk
390 back-ends of &product-name;. For each such format, such as
391 VDI, VMDK, or RAW, this subcommand lists the back-end's
392 capabilities and configuration.
393 </para>
394 </listitem>
395
396 <listitem>
397 <para>
398 <command>hdds</command>, <command>dvds</command>,
399 <command>floppies</command>: Shows information about virtual
400 disk images currently in use by &product-name;, including all
401 their settings, the unique identifiers (UUIDs) associated with
402 them by &product-name; and all files associated with them.
403 This is the command-line equivalent of the Virtual Media
404 Manager. See <xref linkend="vdis" />.
405 </para>
406 </listitem>
407
408 <listitem>
409 <para>
410 <command>usbhost</command>: Shows information about USB
411 devices attached to the host, including information useful for
412 constructing USB filters and whether they are currently in use
413 by the host.
414 </para>
415 </listitem>
416
417 <listitem>
418 <para>
419 <command>usbfilters</command>: Lists all global USB filters
420 registered with &product-name; and displays the filter
421 parameters. Global USB filters are for devices which are
422 accessible to all virtual machines.
423 </para>
424 </listitem>
425
426 <listitem>
427 <para>
428 <command>systemproperties</command>: Displays some global
429 &product-name; settings, such as minimum and maximum guest RAM
430 and virtual hard disk size, folder settings and the current
431 authentication library in use.
432 </para>
433 </listitem>
434
435 <listitem>
436 <para>
437 <command>extpacks</command>: Displays all &product-name;
438 extension packs that are currently installed. See
439 <xref linkend="intro-installing" /> and
440 <xref linkend="vboxmanage-extpack" />.
441 </para>
442 </listitem>
443
444 <listitem>
445 <para>
446 <command>groups</command>: Displays details of the VM Groups.
447 See <xref linkend="gui-vmgroups" />.
448 </para>
449 </listitem>
450
451 <listitem>
452 <para>
453 <command>webcams</command>: Displays a list of webcams
454 attached to the running VM. The output format is a list of
455 absolute paths or aliases that were used for attaching the
456 webcams to the VM using the webcam attach command.
457 </para>
458 </listitem>
459
460 <listitem>
461 <para>
462 <command>screenshotformats</command>: Displays a list of
463 available screenshot formats.
464 </para>
465 </listitem>
466
467 <listitem>
468 <para>
469 <command>cloudproviders</command>: Displays a list of cloud
470 providers that are supported by &product-name;. &oci; is an
471 example of a cloud provider.
472 </para>
473 </listitem>
474
475 <listitem>
476 <para>
477 <command>cloudprofiles</command>: Displays a list of cloud
478 profiles that have been configured.
479 </para>
480
481 <para>
482 Cloud profiles are used when exporting VMs to a cloud service.
483 See <xref linkend="ovf-export-oci"/>.
484 </para>
485 </listitem>
486
487 </itemizedlist>
488
489 </sect1>
490
491 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-showvminfo">
492
493 <title>VBoxManage showvminfo</title>
494
495 <para>
496 The <command>showvminfo</command> command shows information about
497 a particular virtual machine. This is the same information as
498 <command>VBoxManage list vms --long</command> would show for all
499 virtual machines.
500 </para>
501
502 <para>
503 You will see information as shown in the following example.
504 </para>
505
506<screen>$ VBoxManage showvminfo "Windows XP"
507VirtualBox Command Line Management Interface Version <replaceable>version-number</replaceable>
508(C) 2005-2018 Oracle Corporation
509All rights reserved.
510
511Name: Windows XP
512Guest OS: Other/Unknown
513UUID: 1bf3464d-57c6-4d49-92a9-a5cc3816b7e7
514Config file: /home/username/.config/VirtualBox/Machines/Windows XP/Windows XP.xml
515Memory size: 512MB
516VRAM size: 12MB
517Number of CPUs: 2
518Boot menu mode: message and menu
519Boot Device (1): DVD
520Boot Device (2): HardDisk
521Boot Device (3): Not Assigned
522Boot Device (4): Not Assigned
523ACPI: on
524IOAPIC: on
525...
526 </screen>
527
528 <para>
529 Use the <computeroutput>--machinereadable</computeroutput> option
530 to produce the same output, but in machine readable format with a
531 property=value string on each line. For example:
532 </para>
533
534<screen>
535...
536groups="/"
537ostype="Oracle (64-bit)"
538UUID="457af700-bc0a-4258-aa3c-13b03da171f2"
539...
540 </screen>
541
542 </sect1>
543
544 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-registervm">
545
546 <title>VBoxManage registervm/unregistervm</title>
547
548 <para>
549 The <computeroutput>registervm</computeroutput> command enables
550 you to import a virtual machine definition in an XML file into
551 &product-name;. The machine must not conflict with one already
552 registered in &product-name; and it may not have any hard or
553 removable disks attached. It is advisable to place the definition
554 file in the machines folder before registering it.
555 </para>
556
557 <note>
558 <para>
559 When creating a new virtual machine with <command>VBoxManage
560 createvm</command>, as shown in
561 <xref linkend="vboxmanage-createvm"/>, you can directly specify
562 the <option>--register</option> option to avoid having to
563 register it separately.
564 </para>
565 </note>
566
567 <para>
568 The <command>unregistervm</command> command unregisters a virtual
569 machine. If <option>--delete</option> is also specified, the
570 following files will also be deleted automatically:
571 </para>
572
573 <itemizedlist>
574
575 <listitem>
576 <para>
577 All hard disk image files, including differencing files, which
578 are used by the machine and not shared with other machines.
579 </para>
580 </listitem>
581
582 <listitem>
583 <para>
584 Saved state files that the machine created. One if the machine
585 was in Saved state and one for each online snapshot.
586 </para>
587 </listitem>
588
589 <listitem>
590 <para>
591 The machine XML file and its backups.
592 </para>
593 </listitem>
594
595 <listitem>
596 <para>
597 The machine log files.
598 </para>
599 </listitem>
600
601 <listitem>
602 <para>
603 The machine directory, if it is empty after having deleted all
604 of the above files.
605 </para>
606 </listitem>
607
608 </itemizedlist>
609
610 </sect1>
611
612 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-createvm">
613
614 <title>VBoxManage createvm</title>
615
616 <para>
617 The <command>VBoxManage createvm</command> command creates a new
618 XML virtual machine definition file.
619 </para>
620
621 <para>
622 You must specify the name of the VM by using <option>--name
623 <replaceable>name</replaceable></option>. This name is used by
624 default as the file name of the settings file that has the
625 <computeroutput>.xml</computeroutput> extension and the machine
626 folder, which is a subfolder of the
627 <computeroutput>.config/VirtualBox/Machines</computeroutput>
628 folder. Note that the machine folder path name varies based on the
629 OS type and the &product-name; version.
630 </para>
631
632 <para>
633 Ensure that the VM name conforms to the host OS's file name
634 requirements. If you later rename the VM, the file and folder
635 names will be updated to match the new name automatically.
636 </para>
637
638 <para>
639 The <option>--basefolder <replaceable>path</replaceable></option>
640 option specifies the machine folder path name. Note that the names
641 of the file and the folder do not change if you rename the VM.
642 </para>
643
644 <para>
645 The <option>--group <replaceable>group-ID</replaceable>,
646 ...</option> option assigns the VM to the specified groups. Note
647 that group IDs always start with
648 <computeroutput>/</computeroutput> so that they can be nested. By
649 default, each VM is assigned membership to the
650 <computeroutput>/</computeroutput> group.
651 </para>
652
653 <para>
654 The <option>--ostype <replaceable>ostype</replaceable></option>
655 option specifies the guest OS to run in the VM. Run the
656 <command>VBoxManage list ostypes</command> command to see the
657 available OS types.
658 </para>
659
660 <para>
661 The <option>--uuid <replaceable>uuid</replaceable></option> option
662 specifies the universal unique identifier (UUID) of the VM. The
663 UUID must be unique within the namespace of the host or of its VM
664 group memberships. By default, the <command>VBoxManage</command>
665 command automatically generates the UUID.
666 </para>
667
668 <para>
669 The <computeroutput>--default</computeroutput> option applies a
670 default hardware configuration for the specified guest OS. By
671 default, the VM is created with minimal hardware.
672 </para>
673
674 <para>
675 The <option>--register</option> option registers the VM with your
676 &product-name; installation. By default, the <command>VBoxManage
677 createvm</command> command creates only the XML configuration for
678 the VM but does not registered the VM. If you do not register the
679 VM at creation, you can run the <command>VBoxManage
680 registervm</command> command after you create the VM.
681 </para>
682
683 </sect1>
684
685 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-modifyvm">
686
687 <title>VBoxManage modifyvm</title>
688
689 <para>
690 This command changes the properties of a registered virtual
691 machine which is not running. Most of the properties that this
692 command makes available correspond to the VM settings that
693 &product-name; graphical user interface displays in each VM's
694 <emphasis role="bold">Settings</emphasis> dialog. These are
695 described in <xref linkend="BasicConcepts" />. However, some of
696 the more advanced settings are only available through the
697 <command>VBoxManage</command> interface.
698 </para>
699
700 <para>
701 These commands require that the machine is powered off, neither
702 running nor in a Saved state. Some machine settings can also be
703 changed while a machine is running. Those settings will then have
704 a corresponding subcommand with the <command>VBoxManage
705 controlvm</command> subcommand. See
706 <xref linkend="vboxmanage-controlvm" />.
707 </para>
708
709 <sect2 id="vboxmanage-modifyvm-general">
710
711 <title>General Settings</title>
712
713 <para>
714 The following general settings are available through
715 <command>VBoxManage modifyvm</command>:
716 </para>
717
718 <itemizedlist>
719
720 <listitem>
721 <para>
722 <computeroutput>--name &lt;name&gt;</computeroutput>:
723 Changes the VM's name and can be used to rename the internal
724 virtual machine files, as described in
725 <xref linkend="vboxmanage-createvm"/>.
726 </para>
727 </listitem>
728
729 <listitem>
730 <para>
731 <computeroutput>--groups &lt;group&gt;,
732 ...</computeroutput>: Changes the group membership of a VM.
733 Groups always start with a
734 <computeroutput>/</computeroutput> and can be nested. By
735 default VMs are in group <computeroutput>/</computeroutput>.
736 </para>
737 </listitem>
738
739 <listitem>
740 <para>
741 <computeroutput>--description &lt;desc&gt;</computeroutput>:
742 Changes the VM's description, which is a way to record
743 details about the VM in a way which is meaningful for the
744 user. The GUI interprets HTML formatting, the command line
745 allows arbitrary strings potentially containing multiple
746 lines.
747 </para>
748 </listitem>
749
750 <listitem>
751 <para>
752 <computeroutput>--ostype &lt;ostype&gt;</computeroutput>:
753 Specifies what guest operating system is supposed to run in
754 the VM. To learn about the various identifiers that can be
755 used here, use <command>VBoxManage list ostypes</command>.
756 </para>
757 </listitem>
758
759 <listitem>
760 <para>
761 <computeroutput>--iconfile
762 &lt;filename&gt;</computeroutput>: Specifies the absolute
763 path on the host file system for the &product-name; icon to
764 be displayed in the VM.
765 </para>
766 </listitem>
767
768 <listitem>
769 <para>
770 <computeroutput>--memory
771 &lt;memorysize&gt;</computeroutput>: Sets the amount of RAM,
772 in MB, that the virtual machine should allocate for itself
773 from the host. See <xref linkend="gui-createvm" />.
774 </para>
775 </listitem>
776
777 <listitem>
778 <para>
779 <computeroutput>--pagefusion on|off</computeroutput>:
780 Enables and disables the Page Fusion feature. Page Fusion is
781 disabled by default. The Page Fusion feature minimises
782 memory duplication between VMs with similar configurations
783 running on the same host. See
784 <xref linkend="guestadd-pagefusion" />.
785 </para>
786 </listitem>
787
788 <listitem>
789 <para>
790 <computeroutput>--vram &lt;vramsize&gt;</computeroutput>:
791 Sets the amount of RAM that the virtual graphics card should
792 have. See <xref linkend="settings-display" />.
793 </para>
794 </listitem>
795
796 <listitem>
797 <para>
798 <computeroutput>--acpi on|off</computeroutput> and
799 <computeroutput>--ioapic on|off</computeroutput>: Determines
800 whether the VM has ACPI and I/O APIC support. See
801 <xref linkend="settings-motherboard" />.
802 </para>
803 </listitem>
804
805 <listitem>
806 <para>
807 <computeroutput>--pciattach &lt;host PCI address [@ guest
808 PCI bus address]&gt;</computeroutput>: Attaches a specified
809 PCI network controller on the host to a specified PCI bus on
810 the guest. See <xref linkend="pcipassthrough" />.
811 </para>
812 </listitem>
813
814 <listitem>
815 <para>
816 <computeroutput>--pcidetach &lt;host PCI
817 address&gt;</computeroutput>: Detaches a specified PCI
818 network controller on the host from the attached PCI bus on
819 the guest. See <xref linkend="pcipassthrough" />.
820 </para>
821 </listitem>
822
823 <listitem>
824 <para>
825 <computeroutput>--hardwareuuid
826 &lt;uuid&gt;</computeroutput>: The UUID presented to the
827 guest through memory tables (DMI/SMBIOS), hardware, and
828 guest properties. By default this is the same as the VM
829 UUID. This setting is useful when cloning a VM. Teleporting
830 takes care of this automatically.
831 </para>
832 </listitem>
833
834 <listitem>
835 <para>
836 <computeroutput>--cpus &lt;cpucount&gt;</computeroutput>:
837 Sets the number of virtual CPUs for the virtual machine, see
838 <xref linkend="settings-processor" />. If CPU hot-plugging
839 is enabled, this then sets the <emphasis>maximum</emphasis>
840 number of virtual CPUs that can be plugged into the virtual
841 machines.
842 </para>
843 </listitem>
844
845 <listitem>
846 <para>
847 <computeroutput>--cpuhotplug on|off</computeroutput>:
848 Enables CPU hot-plugging. When enabled, virtual CPUs can be
849 added to and removed from a virtual machine while it is
850 running. See <xref linkend="cpuhotplug" />.
851 </para>
852 </listitem>
853
854 <listitem>
855 <para>
856 <computeroutput>--plugcpu|unplugcpu
857 &lt;id&gt;</computeroutput>: If CPU hot-plugging is enabled,
858 this setting adds or removes a virtual CPU on the virtual
859 machine. <computeroutput>&lt;id&gt;</computeroutput>
860 specifies the index of the virtual CPU to be added or
861 removed and must be a number from 0 to the maximum number of
862 CPUs configured with the
863 <computeroutput>--cpus</computeroutput> option. CPU 0 can
864 never be removed.
865 </para>
866 </listitem>
867
868 <listitem>
869 <para>
870 <computeroutput>--cpuexecutioncap
871 &lt;1-100&gt;</computeroutput>: Controls how much CPU time a
872 virtual CPU can use. A value of 50 implies a single virtual
873 CPU can use up to 50% of a single host CPU.
874 </para>
875 </listitem>
876
877 <listitem>
878 <para>
879 <computeroutput>--pae on|off</computeroutput>: Enables and
880 disables PAE. See <xref linkend="settings-processor" />.
881 </para>
882 </listitem>
883
884 <listitem>
885 <para>
886 <computeroutput>--longmode on|off</computeroutput>: Enables
887 and disables long mode. See
888 <xref linkend="settings-processor" />.
889 </para>
890 </listitem>
891
892 <listitem>
893 <para>
894 <computeroutput>--spec-ctrl on|off</computeroutput>: Enables
895 and disables the exposure of speculation control interfaces
896 to the guest, provided they are available on the host.
897 Depending on the host CPU and workload, enabling speculation
898 control may significantly reduce performance.
899 </para>
900 </listitem>
901
902 <listitem>
903 <para>
904 <computeroutput>--cpu-profile &lt;host|intel
905 80[86|286|386]&gt;</computeroutput>: Enables specification
906 of a profile for guest CPU emulation. Specify either one
907 based on the host system CPU (host), or one from a number of
908 older Intel Micro-architectures: 8086, 80286, 80386.
909 </para>
910 </listitem>
911
912 <listitem>
913 <para>
914 <computeroutput>--hpet on|off</computeroutput>: Enables and
915 disables a High Precision Event Timer (HPET) which can
916 replace the legacy system timers. This is turned off by
917 default. Note that Windows supports a HPET only from Vista
918 onwards.
919 </para>
920 </listitem>
921
922 <listitem>
923 <para>
924 <computeroutput>--hwvirtex on|off</computeroutput>: Enables
925 and disables the use of hardware virtualization extensions,
926 such as Intel VT-x or AMD-V, in the processor of your host
927 system. See <xref linkend="hwvirt" />.
928 </para>
929 </listitem>
930
931 <listitem>
932 <para>
933 <computeroutput>--triplefaultreset on|off</computeroutput>:
934 Enables resetting of the guest instead of triggering a Guru
935 Meditation. Some guests raise a triple fault to reset the
936 CPU so sometimes this is desired behavior. Works only for
937 non-SMP guests.
938 </para>
939 </listitem>
940
941 <listitem>
942 <para>
943 <computeroutput>--apic on|off</computeroutput>: Enables and
944 disables I/O APIC. With I/O APIC, operating systems can use
945 more than 16 interrupt requests (IRQs) thus avoiding IRQ
946 sharing for improved reliability. This setting is enabled by
947 default. See <xref linkend="settings-motherboard" />.
948 </para>
949 </listitem>
950
951 <listitem>
952 <para>
953 <computeroutput>--x2apic on|off</computeroutput>: Enables
954 and disables CPU x2APIC support. CPU x2APIC support helps
955 operating systems run more efficiently on high core count
956 configurations, and optimizes interrupt distribution in
957 virtualized environments. This setting is enabled by
958 default. Disable this setting when using host or guest
959 operating systems that are incompatible with x2APIC support.
960 </para>
961 </listitem>
962
963 <listitem>
964 <para>
965 <computeroutput>--paravirtprovider
966 none|default|legacy|minimal|hyperv|kvm</computeroutput>:
967 Specifies which paravirtualization interface to provide to
968 the guest operating system. Specifying
969 <computeroutput>none</computeroutput> explicitly turns off
970 exposing any paravirtualization interface. The option
971 <computeroutput>default</computeroutput> selects an
972 appropriate interface when starting the VM, depending on the
973 guest OS type. This is the default option chosen when
974 creating new VMs. The
975 <computeroutput>legacy</computeroutput> option is used for
976 VMs which were created with older &product-name; versions
977 and will pick a paravirtualization interface when starting
978 the VM with &product-name; 5.0 and newer. The
979 <computeroutput>minimal</computeroutput> provider is
980 mandatory for Mac OS X guests.
981 <computeroutput>kvm</computeroutput> and
982 <computeroutput>hyperv</computeroutput> are recommended for
983 Linux and Windows guests respectively. These options are
984 explained in <xref linkend="gimproviders" />.
985 </para>
986 </listitem>
987
988 <listitem>
989 <para>
990 <computeroutput>--paravirtdebug &lt;keyword=value&gt;
991 [,&lt;keyword=value&gt; ...]</computeroutput>: Specifies
992 debugging options specific to the paravirtualization
993 provider configured for this VM. See the provider specific
994 options in <xref linkend="gimdebug" /> for a list of
995 supported keyword-value pairs for each provider.
996 </para>
997 </listitem>
998
999 <listitem>
1000 <para>
1001 <computeroutput>--nestedpaging on|off</computeroutput>: If
1002 hardware virtualization is enabled, this additional setting
1003 enables or disables the use of the nested paging feature in
1004 the processor of your host system. See
1005 <xref linkend="hwvirt" /> and
1006 <xref linkend="sec-rec-cve-2018-3646" />.
1007 </para>
1008 </listitem>
1009
1010 <listitem>
1011 <para>
1012 <computeroutput>--largepages on|off</computeroutput>: If
1013 hardware virtualization <emphasis>and</emphasis> nested
1014 paging are enabled, for Intel VT-x only, an additional
1015 performance improvement of up to 5% can be obtained by
1016 enabling this setting. This causes the hypervisor to use
1017 large pages to reduce TLB use and overhead.
1018 </para>
1019 </listitem>
1020
1021 <listitem>
1022 <para>
1023 <computeroutput>--vtxvpid on|off</computeroutput>: If
1024 hardware virtualization is enabled, for Intel VT-x only,
1025 this additional setting enables or disables the use of the
1026 tagged TLB (VPID) feature in the processor of your host
1027 system. See <xref linkend="hwvirt" />.
1028 </para>
1029 </listitem>
1030
1031 <listitem>
1032 <para>
1033 <computeroutput>--vtxux on|off</computeroutput>: If hardware
1034 virtualization is enabled, for Intel VT-x only, this setting
1035 enables or disables the use of the unrestricted guest mode
1036 feature for executing your guest.
1037 </para>
1038 </listitem>
1039
1040 <listitem>
1041 <para>
1042 <computeroutput>--accelerate3d on|off</computeroutput>: If
1043 the Guest Additions are installed, this setting enables or
1044 disables hardware 3D acceleration. See
1045 <xref linkend="guestadd-3d" />.
1046 </para>
1047 </listitem>
1048
1049 <listitem>
1050 <para>
1051 <computeroutput>--accelerate2dvideo on|off</computeroutput>:
1052 If the Guest Additions are installed, this setting enables
1053 or disables 2D video acceleration. See
1054 <xref linkend="guestadd-2d" />.
1055 </para>
1056 </listitem>
1057
1058 <listitem>
1059 <para>
1060 <computeroutput>--chipset piix3|ich9</computeroutput>: By
1061 default, &product-name; emulates an Intel PIIX3 chipset.
1062 Usually there is no reason to change the default setting
1063 unless this is required to relax some of its constraints.
1064 See <xref linkend="settings-motherboard" />.
1065 </para>
1066 </listitem>
1067
1068 <listitem>
1069 <para>
1070 You can influence the BIOS logo that is displayed when a
1071 virtual machine starts up with a number of settings. By
1072 default, an &product-name; logo is displayed.
1073 </para>
1074
1075 <para>
1076 With <computeroutput>--bioslogofadein
1077 on|off</computeroutput> and
1078 <computeroutput>--bioslogofadeout on|off</computeroutput>,
1079 you can determine whether the logo should fade in and out,
1080 respectively.
1081 </para>
1082
1083 <para>
1084 With <computeroutput>--bioslogodisplaytime
1085 &lt;msec&gt;</computeroutput> you can set how long the logo
1086 should be visible, in milliseconds.
1087 </para>
1088
1089 <para>
1090 With <computeroutput>--bioslogoimagepath
1091 &lt;imagepath&gt;</computeroutput> you can replace the image
1092 that is shown with your own logo. The image must be an
1093 uncompressed 256 color BMP file without color space
1094 information (Windows 3.0 format). The image must not be
1095 bigger than 640 x 480.
1096 </para>
1097 </listitem>
1098
1099 <listitem>
1100 <para>
1101 <computeroutput>--biosbootmenu
1102 disabled|menuonly|messageandmenu</computeroutput>: Specifies
1103 whether the BIOS enables the user to select a temporary boot
1104 device. The <computeroutput>menuonly</computeroutput> option
1105 suppresses the message, but the user can still press F12 to
1106 select a temporary boot device.
1107 </para>
1108 </listitem>
1109
1110 <listitem>
1111 <para>
1112 <computeroutput>--biosapic
1113 x2apic|apic|disabled</computeroutput>: Specifies the
1114 firmware APIC level to be used. Options are: x2apic, apic or
1115 disabled (no apic or x2apic) respectively.
1116 </para>
1117
1118 <para>
1119 Note that if x2apic is specified and x2APIC is unsupported
1120 by the VCPU, biosapic downgrades to apic, if supported.
1121 Otherwise biosapic downgrades to disabled. Similarly, if
1122 apic is specified, and APIC is unsupported, a downgrade to
1123 disabled results.
1124 </para>
1125 </listitem>
1126
1127 <listitem>
1128 <para>
1129 <computeroutput>--biossystemtimeoffset
1130 &lt;ms&gt;</computeroutput>: Specifies a fixed time offset,
1131 in milliseconds, of the guest relative to the host time. If
1132 the offset is positive, the guest time runs ahead of the
1133 host time.
1134 </para>
1135 </listitem>
1136
1137 <listitem>
1138 <para>
1139 <computeroutput>--biospxedebug on|off</computeroutput>:
1140 Enables additional debugging output when using the Intel PXE
1141 boot ROM. The output is written to the release log file. See
1142 <xref linkend="collect-debug-info" />.
1143 </para>
1144 </listitem>
1145
1146 <listitem>
1147 <para>
1148 <computeroutput>--boot&lt;1-4&gt;
1149 none|floppy|dvd|disk|net</computeroutput>: Specifies the
1150 boot order for the virtual machine. There are four
1151 <emphasis>slots</emphasis>, which the VM will try to access
1152 from 1 to 4, and for each of which you can set a device that
1153 the VM should attempt to boot from.
1154 </para>
1155 </listitem>
1156
1157 <listitem>
1158 <para>
1159 <computeroutput>--rtcuseutc on|off</computeroutput>: Sets
1160 the real-time clock (RTC) to operate in UTC time. See
1161 <xref linkend="settings-motherboard" />.
1162 </para>
1163 </listitem>
1164
1165 <listitem>
1166 <para>
1167 <computeroutput>--graphicscontroller
1168 none|vboxvga|vmsvga|vboxsvga</computeroutput>: Specifies the
1169 use of a graphics controller, with an option to choose a
1170 specific type. See <xref linkend="settings-screen" />.
1171 </para>
1172 </listitem>
1173
1174 <listitem>
1175 <para>
1176 <computeroutput>--snapshotfolder
1177 default|&lt;path&gt;</computeroutput>: Specifies the folder
1178 where snapshots are kept for a virtual machine.
1179 </para>
1180 </listitem>
1181
1182 <listitem>
1183 <para>
1184 <computeroutput>--firmware
1185 bios|efi|efi32|efi64</computeroutput>: Specifies the
1186 firmware to be used to boot the VM: Available options are:
1187 BIOS, or one of the EFI options: efi, efi32, or efi64. Use
1188 EFI options with care.
1189 </para>
1190 </listitem>
1191
1192 <listitem>
1193 <para>
1194 <computeroutput>--guestmemoryballoon
1195 &lt;size&gt;</computeroutput> Sets the default size of the
1196 guest memory balloon. This is the memory allocated by the
1197 &product-name; Guest Additions from the guest operating
1198 system and returned to the hypervisor for reuse by other
1199 virtual machines.
1200 <computeroutput>&lt;size&gt;</computeroutput> must be
1201 specified in megabytes. The default size is 0 megabytes. See
1202 <xref linkend="guestadd-balloon" />.
1203 </para>
1204 </listitem>
1205
1206 <listitem>
1207 <para>
1208 <computeroutput>--defaultfrontend
1209 default|&lt;name&gt;</computeroutput>: Specifies the default
1210 frontend to be used when starting this VM. See
1211 <xref linkend="vboxmanage-startvm" />.
1212 </para>
1213 </listitem>
1214
1215 </itemizedlist>
1216
1217 </sect2>
1218
1219 <sect2 id="vboxmanage-modifyvm-networking">
1220
1221 <title>Networking Settings</title>
1222
1223 <para>
1224 The following networking settings are available through
1225 <command>VBoxManage modifyvm</command>. With all these settings,
1226 the decimal number directly following the option name, 1-N in
1227 the list below, specifies the virtual network adapter whose
1228 settings should be changed.
1229 </para>
1230
1231 <itemizedlist>
1232
1233 <listitem>
1234 <para>
1235 <computeroutput>--nic&lt;1-N&gt;
1236 none|null|nat|natnetwork|bridged|intnet|hostonly|generic</computeroutput>:
1237 Configures the type of networking for each of the VM's
1238 virtual network cards. Options are: not present
1239 (<computeroutput>none</computeroutput>), not connected to
1240 the host (<computeroutput>null</computeroutput>), use
1241 network address translation
1242 (<computeroutput>nat</computeroutput>), use the new network
1243 address translation engine
1244 (<computeroutput>natnetwork</computeroutput>), bridged
1245 networking (<computeroutput>bridged</computeroutput>), or
1246 use internal networking
1247 (<computeroutput>intnet</computeroutput>), host-only
1248 networking (<computeroutput>hostonly</computeroutput>), or
1249 access rarely used sub-modes
1250 (<computeroutput>generic</computeroutput>). These options
1251 correspond to the modes described in
1252 <xref
1253 linkend="networkingmodes" />.
1254 </para>
1255 </listitem>
1256
1257 <listitem>
1258 <para>
1259 <computeroutput>--nictype&lt;1-N&gt;
1260 Am79C970A|Am79C973|82540EM|82543GC|82545EM|virtio</computeroutput>:
1261 Enables you to specify the networking hardware that
1262 &product-name; presents to the guest for a specified VM
1263 virtual network card. See <xref linkend="nichardware" />.
1264 </para>
1265 </listitem>
1266
1267 <listitem>
1268 <para>
1269 <computeroutput>--cableconnected&lt;1-N&gt;
1270 on|off</computeroutput>: Enables you to temporarily
1271 disconnect a virtual network interface, as if a network
1272 cable had been pulled from a real network card. This might
1273 be useful, for example for resetting certain software
1274 components in the VM.
1275 </para>
1276 </listitem>
1277
1278 <listitem>
1279 <para>
1280 With the <computeroutput>nictrace</computeroutput> options,
1281 you can optionally trace network traffic by dumping it to a
1282 file, for debugging purposes.
1283 </para>
1284
1285 <para>
1286 With <computeroutput>--nictrace&lt;1-N&gt;
1287 on|off</computeroutput>, you can enable network tracing for
1288 a particular virtual network card.
1289 </para>
1290
1291 <para>
1292 If enabled, you must specify with
1293 <computeroutput>--nictracefile&lt;1-N&gt;
1294 &lt;filename&gt;</computeroutput> the absolute path of the
1295 file the trace should be logged to.
1296 </para>
1297 </listitem>
1298
1299 <listitem>
1300 <para>
1301 <computeroutput>--nicproperty&lt;1-N&gt;
1302 &lt;paramname&gt;="paramvalue"</computeroutput>: This
1303 option, in combination with
1304 <computeroutput>nicgenericdrv</computeroutput> enables you
1305 to pass parameters to rarely-used network backends.
1306 </para>
1307
1308 <para>
1309 These parameters are backend engine-specific, and are
1310 different between UDP Tunnel and the VDE backend drivers.
1311 For examples, see <xref linkend="network_udp_tunnel" />.
1312 </para>
1313 </listitem>
1314
1315 <listitem>
1316 <para>
1317 <computeroutput>--nicspeed&lt;1-N&gt;
1318 &lt;kbps&gt;</computeroutput>: Only has an effect if generic
1319 networking has been enabled for a particular virtual network
1320 card. See the <computeroutput>--nic</computeroutput> option.
1321 This mode enables access to rarely used networking
1322 sub-modes, such as VDE network or UDP Tunnel. This option
1323 specifies the throughput rate in KBps.
1324 </para>
1325 </listitem>
1326
1327 <listitem>
1328 <para>
1329 <computeroutput>--nicbootprio&lt;1-N&gt;
1330 &lt;priority&gt;</computeroutput>: Specifies the order in
1331 which NICs are tried for booting over the network, using
1332 PXE. The priority is an integer in the 0 to 4 range.
1333 Priority 1 is the highest, priority 4 is low. Priority 0,
1334 which is the default unless otherwise specified, is the
1335 lowest.
1336 </para>
1337
1338 <para>
1339 Note that this option only has an effect when the Intel PXE
1340 boot ROM is used.
1341 </para>
1342 </listitem>
1343
1344 <listitem>
1345 <para>
1346 <computeroutput>--nicpromisc&lt;1-N&gt;
1347 deny|allow-vms|allow-all</computeroutput>: Enables you to
1348 specify how promiscuous mode is handled for the specified VM
1349 virtual network card. This setting is only relevant for
1350 bridged networking. <computeroutput>deny</computeroutput>,
1351 the default setting, hides any traffic not intended for the
1352 VM. <computeroutput>allow-vms</computeroutput> hides all
1353 host traffic from the VM, but allows the VM to see traffic
1354 to and from other VMs.
1355 <computeroutput>allow-all</computeroutput> removes this
1356 restriction completely.
1357 </para>
1358 </listitem>
1359
1360 <listitem>
1361 <para>
1362 <computeroutput>--nicbandwidthgroup&lt;1-N&gt;
1363 none|&lt;name&gt;</computeroutput>: Adds and removes an
1364 assignment of a bandwidth group for the specified virtual
1365 network interface. Specifying
1366 <computeroutput>none</computeroutput> removes any current
1367 bandwidth group assignment from the specified virtual
1368 network interface. Specifying
1369 <computeroutput>&lt;name&gt;</computeroutput> adds an
1370 assignment of a bandwidth group to the specified virtual
1371 network interface.
1372 </para>
1373
1374 <para>
1375 See <xref linkend="network_bandwidth_limit" />.
1376 </para>
1377 </listitem>
1378
1379 <listitem>
1380 <para>
1381 <computeroutput>--bridgeadapter&lt;1-N&gt;
1382 none|&lt;devicename&gt;</computeroutput>: Only has an effect
1383 if bridged networking has been enabled for a virtual network
1384 card. See the <computeroutput>--nic</computeroutput> option.
1385 Use this option to specify which host interface the given
1386 virtual network interface will use. See
1387 <xref linkend="network_bridged" />.
1388 </para>
1389 </listitem>
1390
1391 <listitem>
1392 <para>
1393 <computeroutput>--hostonlyadapter&lt;1-N&gt;
1394 none|&lt;devicename&gt;</computeroutput>: Only has an effect
1395 if host-only networking has been enabled for a virtual
1396 network card. See the <computeroutput>--nic</computeroutput>
1397 option. Use this option to specify which host-only
1398 networking interface the given virtual network interface
1399 will use. See <xref linkend="network_hostonly" />.
1400 </para>
1401 </listitem>
1402
1403 <listitem>
1404 <para>
1405 <computeroutput>--intnet&lt;1-N&gt;
1406 network</computeroutput>: Only has an effect if internal
1407 networking has been enabled for a virtual network card. See
1408 the <computeroutput>--nic</computeroutput> option. Use this
1409 option to specify the name of the internal network. See
1410 <xref linkend="network_internal" />.
1411 </para>
1412 </listitem>
1413
1414 <listitem>
1415 <para>
1416 <computeroutput>--nat-network&lt;1-N&gt; &lt;network
1417 name&gt;</computeroutput>: If the networking type is set to
1418 <computeroutput>natnetwork</computeroutput>, not
1419 <computeroutput>nat</computeroutput>, then this setting
1420 specifies the name of the NAT network this adapter is
1421 connected to. Optional.
1422 </para>
1423 </listitem>
1424
1425 <listitem>
1426 <para>
1427 <computeroutput>--nicgenericdrv&lt;1-N&gt; &lt;backend
1428 driver&gt;</computeroutput>: Only has an effect if generic
1429 networking has been enabled for a virtual network card. See
1430 the <computeroutput>--nic</computeroutput> option. This mode
1431 enables you to access rarely used networking sub-modes, such
1432 as VDE network or UDP Tunnel.
1433 </para>
1434 </listitem>
1435
1436 <listitem>
1437 <para>
1438 <computeroutput>--macaddress&lt;1-N&gt;
1439 auto|&lt;mac&gt;</computeroutput>: With this option you can
1440 set the MAC address of a particular network adapter on the
1441 VM. Normally, each network adapter is assigned a random
1442 address by &product-name; at VM creation.
1443 </para>
1444 </listitem>
1445
1446 </itemizedlist>
1447
1448 <sect3 id="vboxmanage-modifyvm-networking-nat">
1449
1450 <title>NAT Networking Settings</title>
1451
1452 <para>
1453 The following NAT networking settings are available through
1454 <command>VBoxManage modifyvm</command>. With all these
1455 settings, the decimal number directly following the option
1456 name, 1-N in the list below, specifies the virtual network
1457 adapter whose settings should be changed.
1458 </para>
1459
1460 <itemizedlist>
1461
1462 <listitem>
1463 <para>
1464 <computeroutput>--natnet&lt;1-N&gt;
1465 &lt;network&gt;|default</computeroutput>: If the
1466 networking type is set to
1467 <computeroutput>nat</computeroutput>, not
1468 <computeroutput>natnetwork</computeroutput>, then this
1469 setting specifies the IP address range to be used for this
1470 network. See <xref linkend="changenat" />.
1471 </para>
1472 </listitem>
1473
1474 <listitem>
1475 <para>
1476 <computeroutput>--natpf&lt;1-N&gt;
1477 [&lt;name&gt;],tcp|udp,[&lt;hostip&gt;],&lt;hostport&gt;,[&lt;guestip&gt;],
1478 &lt;guestport&gt;</computeroutput>: Defines a NAT
1479 port-forwarding rule. See <xref linkend="natforward" />.
1480 </para>
1481 </listitem>
1482
1483 <listitem>
1484 <para>
1485 <computeroutput>--natpf&lt;1-N&gt; delete
1486 &lt;name&gt;</computeroutput>: Deletes a NAT
1487 port-forwarding rule. See <xref linkend="natforward" />.
1488 </para>
1489 </listitem>
1490
1491 <listitem>
1492 <para>
1493 <computeroutput>--nattftpprefix&lt;1-N&gt;
1494 &lt;prefix&gt;</computeroutput>: Defines a prefix for the
1495 built-in TFTP server. For example, where the boot file is
1496 located. See <xref linkend="nat-tftp" /> and
1497 <xref linkend="nat-adv-tftp" />.
1498 </para>
1499 </listitem>
1500
1501 <listitem>
1502 <para>
1503 <computeroutput>--nattftpfile&lt;1-N&gt;
1504 &lt;bootfile&gt;</computeroutput>: Defines the TFT boot
1505 file. See <xref linkend="nat-adv-tftp" />.
1506 </para>
1507 </listitem>
1508
1509 <listitem>
1510 <para>
1511 <computeroutput>--nattftpserver&lt;1-N&gt;
1512 &lt;tftpserver&gt;</computeroutput>: Defines the TFTP
1513 server address to boot from. See
1514 <xref linkend="nat-adv-tftp" />.
1515 </para>
1516 </listitem>
1517
1518 <listitem>
1519 <para>
1520 <computeroutput>--nattbindip&lt;1-N&gt;
1521 &lt;ip;&gt;</computeroutput>: &product-name;'s NAT engine
1522 normally routes TCP/IP packets through the default
1523 interface assigned by the host's TCP/IP stack. Use this
1524 setting to instruct the NAT engine to bind to a specified
1525 IP address instead. See
1526 <xref linkend="nat-adv-settings" />.
1527 </para>
1528 </listitem>
1529
1530 <listitem>
1531 <para>
1532 <computeroutput>--natdnspassdomain&lt;1-N&gt;
1533 on|off</computeroutput>: Specifies whether the built-in
1534 DHCP server passes the domain name for network name
1535 resolution.
1536 </para>
1537 </listitem>
1538
1539 <listitem>
1540 <para>
1541 <computeroutput>--natdnsproxy&lt;1-N&gt;
1542 on|off</computeroutput>: Makes the NAT engine proxy all
1543 guest DNS requests to the host's DNS servers. See
1544 <xref linkend="nat-adv-dns" />.
1545 </para>
1546 </listitem>
1547
1548 <listitem>
1549 <para>
1550 <computeroutput>--natdnshostresolver&lt;1-N&gt;
1551 on|off</computeroutput>: Makes the NAT engine use the
1552 host's resolver mechanisms to handle DNS requests. See
1553 <xref linkend="nat-adv-dns" />.
1554 </para>
1555 </listitem>
1556
1557 <listitem>
1558 <para>
1559 <computeroutput>--natsettings&lt;1-N&gt;
1560 [&lt;mtu&gt;],[&lt;socksnd&gt;],[&lt;sockrcv&gt;],[&lt;tcpsnd&gt;],
1561 [&lt;tcprcv&gt;]</computeroutput>: Controls several NAT
1562 settings. See <xref linkend="nat-adv-settings" />.
1563 </para>
1564 </listitem>
1565
1566 <listitem>
1567 <para>
1568 <computeroutput>--nataliasmode&lt;1-N&gt;
1569 default|[log],[proxyonly],[sameports]</computeroutput>:
1570 Defines behaviour of the NAT engine core: log - enables
1571 logging, proxyonly - switches off aliasing mode and makes
1572 NAT transparent, sameports - enforces the NAT engine to
1573 send packets through the same port as they originated on,
1574 default - disable all aliasing modes. See
1575 <xref linkend="nat-adv-alias" />.
1576 </para>
1577 </listitem>
1578
1579 </itemizedlist>
1580
1581 </sect3>
1582
1583 </sect2>
1584
1585 <sect2 id="vboxmanage-modifyvm-other">
1586
1587 <title>Miscellaneous Settings</title>
1588
1589 <para>
1590 The following hardware settings, such as serial port, audio,
1591 clipboard, drag and drop, monitor, and USB settings are
1592 available through <command>VBoxManage modifyvm</command>:
1593 </para>
1594
1595 <itemizedlist>
1596
1597 <listitem>
1598 <para>
1599 <computeroutput>--mouse
1600 &lt;ps2|usb|usbtablet|usbmultitouch&gt;</computeroutput>:
1601 Specifies the mode of the mouse to be used in the VM.
1602 Available options are: ps2, usb, usbtablet, usbmultitouch.
1603 </para>
1604 </listitem>
1605
1606 <listitem>
1607 <para>
1608 <computeroutput>--keyboard &lt;ps2|usb&gt;</computeroutput>:
1609 Specifies the mode of the keyboard to be used in the VM.
1610 Available options are: ps2, usb.
1611 </para>
1612 </listitem>
1613
1614 <listitem>
1615 <para>
1616 <computeroutput>--uart&lt;1-N&gt; off|&lt;I/O base&gt;
1617 &lt;IRQ&gt;</computeroutput>: Configures virtual serial
1618 ports for the VM. See <xref linkend="serialports" />.
1619 </para>
1620 </listitem>
1621
1622 <listitem>
1623 <para>
1624 <computeroutput>--uartmode&lt;1-N&gt;
1625 &lt;arg&gt;</computeroutput>: Controls how &product-name;
1626 connects a given virtual serial port, configured with the
1627 <computeroutput>--uartX</computeroutput> setting, to the
1628 host on which the virtual machine is running. As described
1629 in <xref linkend="serialports" />, for each such port, you
1630 can specify <computeroutput>&lt;arg&gt;</computeroutput> as
1631 one of the following options:
1632 </para>
1633
1634 <itemizedlist>
1635
1636 <listitem>
1637 <para>
1638 <computeroutput>disconnected</computeroutput>: Even
1639 though the serial port is shown to the guest, it has no
1640 "other end". This is like a real COM port without a
1641 cable.
1642 </para>
1643 </listitem>
1644
1645 <listitem>
1646 <para>
1647 <computeroutput>server
1648 &lt;pipename&gt;</computeroutput>: On a Windows host,
1649 this tells &product-name; to create a named pipe on the
1650 host named
1651 <computeroutput>&lt;pipename&gt;</computeroutput> and
1652 connect the virtual serial device to it. Note that
1653 Windows requires that the name of a named pipe begins
1654 with <computeroutput>\\.\pipe\</computeroutput>.
1655 </para>
1656
1657 <para>
1658 On a Linux host, instead of a named pipe, a local domain
1659 socket is used.
1660 </para>
1661 </listitem>
1662
1663 <listitem>
1664 <para>
1665 <computeroutput>client
1666 &lt;pipename&gt;</computeroutput>: Operates as for
1667 <computeroutput>server</computeroutput>, except that the
1668 pipe, or local domain socket, is not created by
1669 &product-name; but is assumed to exist already.
1670 </para>
1671 </listitem>
1672
1673 <listitem>
1674 <para>
1675 <computeroutput>tcpserver &lt;port&gt;</computeroutput>:
1676 Configures &product-name; to create a TCP socket on the
1677 host with TCP
1678 <computeroutput>&lt;port&gt;</computeroutput> and
1679 connect the virtual serial device to it. Note that
1680 UNIX-like systems require ports over 1024 for normal
1681 users.
1682 </para>
1683 </listitem>
1684
1685 <listitem>
1686 <para>
1687 <computeroutput>tcpclient
1688 &lt;hostname:port&gt;</computeroutput>: Operates as for
1689 <computeroutput>tcpserver</computeroutput>, except that
1690 the TCP socket is not created by &product-name;, but is
1691 assumed to exist already.
1692 </para>
1693 </listitem>
1694
1695 <listitem>
1696 <para>
1697 <computeroutput>uarttype &lt;1-N&gt;
1698 16450|16550A|16750</computeroutput>: Confgures the UART
1699 type for a virtual serial port. The default UART type is
1700 16550A.
1701 </para>
1702 </listitem>
1703
1704 <listitem>
1705 <para>
1706 <computeroutput>file &lt;file&gt;</computeroutput>:
1707 Redirects the serial port output to a raw file
1708 &lt;file&gt; specified by its absolute path on the host
1709 file system.
1710 </para>
1711 </listitem>
1712
1713 <listitem>
1714 <para>
1715 <computeroutput>&lt;devicename&gt;</computeroutput>: If,
1716 instead of the above options, the device name of a
1717 physical hardware serial port of the host is specified,
1718 the virtual serial port is connected to that hardware
1719 port. On a Windows host, the device name will be a COM
1720 port such as <computeroutput>COM1</computeroutput>. On a
1721 Linux host, the device name will be
1722 <computeroutput>/dev/ttyS0</computeroutput> or similar.
1723 This enables you to wire up a real serial port to a
1724 virtual machine.
1725 </para>
1726 </listitem>
1727
1728 </itemizedlist>
1729 </listitem>
1730
1731 <listitem>
1732 <para>
1733 <computeroutput>--lptmode&lt;1-N&gt;
1734 &lt;Device&gt;</computeroutput>: Specifies the Device Name
1735 of the parallel port that the Parallel Port feature will be
1736 using. Use this <emphasis>before</emphasis>
1737 <computeroutput>--lpt</computeroutput>. This feature depends
1738 on the host operating system. For Windows hosts, use a
1739 device name such as lpt1. On Linux hosts, use a device name
1740 such as /dev/lp0.
1741 </para>
1742 </listitem>
1743
1744 <listitem>
1745 <para>
1746 <computeroutput>--lpt&lt;1-N&gt; &lt;I/O base&gt;
1747 &lt;IRQ&gt;</computeroutput>: Specifies the I/O address of
1748 the parallel port and the IRQ number that the Parallel Port
1749 feature will be using. Optional. Use this
1750 <emphasis>after</emphasis>
1751 <computeroutput>--lptmod</computeroutput>. I/O base address
1752 and IRQ are the values that guest sees. For example, the
1753 values avalable under guest Device Manager.
1754 </para>
1755 </listitem>
1756
1757 <listitem>
1758 <para>
1759 <computeroutput>--audio
1760 none|null|dsound|oss|alsa|pulse|coreaudio</computeroutput>:
1761 Specifies whether the VM should have audio support, and if
1762 so, which type. The list of supported audio types depends on
1763 the host and can be determined with <command>VBoxManage
1764 modifyvm</command>.
1765 </para>
1766 </listitem>
1767
1768 <listitem>
1769 <para>
1770 <computeroutput>--audiocontroller
1771 ac97|hda|sb16</computeroutput>: Specifies the audio
1772 controller to be used with the VM.
1773 </para>
1774 </listitem>
1775
1776 <listitem>
1777 <para>
1778 <computeroutput>--audiocodec
1779 stac9700|ad1980|stac9221|sb16</computeroutput>: Specifies
1780 the audio codec to be used with the VM.
1781 </para>
1782 </listitem>
1783
1784 <listitem>
1785 <para>
1786 <computeroutput>--audioin on</computeroutput>: Specifies
1787 whether capturing audio from the host is enabled or
1788 disabled.
1789 </para>
1790 </listitem>
1791
1792 <listitem>
1793 <para>
1794 <computeroutput>--audioout on</computeroutput>: Specifies
1795 whether audio playback from the guest is enabled or
1796 disabled.
1797 </para>
1798 </listitem>
1799
1800 <listitem>
1801 <para>
1802 <computeroutput>--clipboard
1803 disabled|hosttoguest|guesttohost|bidirectional</computeroutput>:
1804 Configues how the guest or host operating system's clipboard
1805 should be shared with the host or guest. See
1806 <xref linkend="generalsettings" />. This setting requires
1807 that the Guest Additions be installed in the virtual
1808 machine.
1809 </para>
1810 </listitem>
1811
1812 <listitem>
1813 <para>
1814 <computeroutput>--draganddrop
1815 disabled|hosttoguest|guesttohost|bidirectional</computeroutput>:
1816 Specifies the drag and drop mode to use between the host and
1817 the virtual machine. See <xref linkend="guestadd-dnd" />.
1818 This requires that the Guest Additions be installed in the
1819 virtual machine.
1820 </para>
1821 </listitem>
1822
1823 <listitem>
1824 <para>
1825 <computeroutput>--monitorcount
1826 &lt;count&gt;</computeroutput>: Enables multi-monitor
1827 support. See <xref linkend="settings-display" />.
1828 </para>
1829 </listitem>
1830
1831 <listitem>
1832 <para>
1833 <computeroutput>--usb on|off</computeroutput>: Enables and
1834 disables the VM's virtual USB controller. See
1835 <xref linkend="settings-usb" />.
1836 </para>
1837 </listitem>
1838
1839 <listitem>
1840 <para>
1841 <computeroutput>--usbehci on|off</computeroutput>: Enables
1842 and disables the VM's virtual USB 2.0 controller. See
1843 <xref linkend="settings-usb" />.
1844 </para>
1845 </listitem>
1846
1847 <listitem>
1848 <para>
1849 <computeroutput>--usbxhci on|off</computeroutput>: Enables
1850 and disables the VM's virtual USB 3.0 controller. See
1851 <xref linkend="settings-usb" />.
1852 </para>
1853 </listitem>
1854
1855 <listitem>
1856 <para>
1857 <computeroutput>--usbrename &lt;oldname&gt;
1858 &lt;newname&gt;</computeroutput>: Enables renaming of the
1859 VM's virtual USB controller from &lt;oldname&gt; to
1860 &lt;newname&gt;.
1861 </para>
1862 </listitem>
1863
1864 </itemizedlist>
1865
1866 </sect2>
1867
1868 <sect2 id="vboxmanage-modifyvm-recording">
1869
1870 <title>Recording Settings</title>
1871
1872 <para>
1873 The <command>VBoxManage modifyvm</command> command enables you
1874 to modify recording settings for video recording, audio
1875 recording, or both.
1876 </para>
1877
1878 <para>
1879 Use the following options to update the recording settings:
1880 </para>
1881
1882 <itemizedlist>
1883
1884 <listitem>
1885 <para>
1886 <option>--recording on|off</option> enables or disables the
1887 recording of a VM session into a WebM/VP8 file. When this
1888 option value is <computeroutput>on</computeroutput>,
1889 recording begins when the VM session starts.
1890 </para>
1891 </listitem>
1892
1893 <listitem>
1894 <para>
1895 <option>--recordingscreens
1896 all|<replaceable>screen-ID</replaceable>
1897 [<replaceable>screen-ID</replaceable> ...]</option> enables
1898 you to specify which VM screens to record. The recording for
1899 each screen that you specify is saved to its own file.
1900 </para>
1901 </listitem>
1902
1903 <listitem>
1904 <para>
1905 <option>--recordingfile
1906 <replaceable>filename</replaceable></option> specifies the
1907 file in which to save the recording.
1908 </para>
1909 </listitem>
1910
1911 <listitem>
1912 <para>
1913 <option>--recordingmaxsize
1914 <replaceable>MB</replaceable></option> specifies the maximum
1915 size of the recorded video file in megabytes. The recording
1916 stops when the file reaches the specified size. If this
1917 value is zero, the recording continues until you stop the
1918 recording.
1919 </para>
1920 </listitem>
1921
1922 <listitem>
1923 <para>
1924 <option>--recordingmaxtime
1925 <replaceable>seconds</replaceable></option> specifies the
1926 maximum amount time to record in seconds. The recording
1927 stops after the specified number of seconds elapses. If this
1928 value is zero, the recording continues until you stop the
1929 recording.
1930 </para>
1931 </listitem>
1932
1933 <listitem>
1934 <para>
1935 <option>--recordingopts
1936 <replaceable>keyword</replaceable>=<replaceable>value</replaceable>[,<replaceable>keyword</replaceable>=<replaceable>value</replaceable>
1937 ...]</option> specifies additional video-recording options
1938 in a comma-separated keyword-value format. For example,
1939 <computeroutput>foo=bar,a=b</computeroutput>.
1940 </para>
1941
1942 <para>
1943 Only use this option only if you are an advanced user. For
1944 information about keywords, see <emphasis>Oracle VM
1945 VirtualBox Programming Guide and Reference</emphasis>.
1946 </para>
1947 </listitem>
1948
1949 <listitem>
1950 <para>
1951 <option>--recordingvideofps
1952 <replaceable>fps</replaceable></option> specifies the
1953 maximum number of video frames per second (FPS) to record.
1954 Frames that have a higher frequency are skipped. Increasing
1955 this value reduces the number of skipped frames and
1956 increases the file size.
1957 </para>
1958 </listitem>
1959
1960 <listitem>
1961 <para>
1962 <option>--recordingvideorate
1963 <replaceable>bit-rate</replaceable></option> specifies the
1964 bit rate of the video in kilobits per second. Increasing
1965 this value improves the appearance of the video at the cost
1966 of an increased file size.
1967 </para>
1968 </listitem>
1969
1970 <listitem>
1971 <para>
1972 <option>--recordingvideores
1973 <replaceable>width</replaceable>x<replaceable>height</replaceable></option>
1974 specifies the video resolution of the recorded video in
1975 pixels.
1976 </para>
1977 </listitem>
1978
1979 </itemizedlist>
1980
1981 </sect2>
1982
1983 <sect2 id="vboxmanage-modifyvm-vrde">
1984
1985 <title>Remote Machine Settings</title>
1986
1987 <para>
1988 The following settings that affect remote machine behavior are
1989 available through <command>VBoxManage modifyvm</command>:
1990 </para>
1991
1992 <itemizedlist>
1993
1994 <listitem>
1995 <para>
1996 <computeroutput>--vrde on|off</computeroutput>: Enables and
1997 disables the VirtualBox Remote Desktop Extension (VRDE)
1998 server.
1999 </para>
2000 </listitem>
2001
2002 <listitem>
2003 <para>
2004 <computeroutput>--vrdeproperty
2005 "TCP/Ports|Address=&lt;value&gt;"</computeroutput>: Sets the
2006 port numbers and IP address on the VM that the VRDE server
2007 can bind to.
2008 </para>
2009
2010 <itemizedlist>
2011
2012 <listitem>
2013 <para>
2014 For TCP/Ports, &lt;value&gt; should be a port or a range
2015 of ports that the VRDE server can bind to.
2016 <computeroutput>default</computeroutput> or
2017 <computeroutput>0</computeroutput> means port 3389, the
2018 standard port for RDP. See the description for the
2019 <computeroutput>--vrdeport</computeroutput> option in
2020 <xref linkend="vboxmanage-modifyvm-vrde" />.
2021 </para>
2022 </listitem>
2023
2024 <listitem>
2025 <para>
2026 For TCP/Address, &lt;value&gt; should be the IP address
2027 of the host network interface that the VRDE server will
2028 bind to. If specified, the server will accept
2029 connections only on the specified host network
2030 interface. See the description for the
2031 <computeroutput>--vrdeaddress</computeroutput> option in
2032 <xref linkend="vboxmanage-modifyvm-vrde" />.
2033 </para>
2034 </listitem>
2035
2036 </itemizedlist>
2037 </listitem>
2038
2039 <listitem>
2040 <para>
2041 <computeroutput>--vrdeproperty
2042 "VideoChannel/Enabled|Quality|DownscaleProtection=&lt;value&gt;"</computeroutput>:
2043 Sets the VRDP video redirection properties.
2044 </para>
2045
2046 <itemizedlist>
2047
2048 <listitem>
2049 <para>
2050 For VideoChannel/Enabled, &lt;value&gt; can be set to
2051 "1", switching the VRDP video channel on. See
2052 <xref linkend="vrde-videochannel" />.
2053 </para>
2054 </listitem>
2055
2056 <listitem>
2057 <para>
2058 For VideoChannel/Quality, &lt;value&gt; should be set
2059 between 10 and 100% inclusive, representing a JPEG
2060 compression level on the VRDE server video channel.
2061 Lower values mean lower quality but higher compression.
2062 See <xref linkend="vrde-videochannel" />.
2063 </para>
2064 </listitem>
2065
2066 <listitem>
2067 <para>
2068 For VideoChannel/DownscaleProtection, &lt;value&gt; can
2069 be set to "1" to enable the videochannel downscale
2070 protection feature. When enabled, if a video's size
2071 equals the shadow buffer size, then it is regarded as a
2072 full screen video, and is displayed. But if its size is
2073 between fullscreen and the downscale threshold then it
2074 is <emphasis>not</emphasis> displayed, as it could be an
2075 application window, which would be unreadable when
2076 downscaled. When the downscale protection feature is
2077 disabled, an attempt is always made to display videos.
2078 </para>
2079 </listitem>
2080
2081 </itemizedlist>
2082 </listitem>
2083
2084 <listitem>
2085 <para>
2086 <computeroutput>--vrdeproperty
2087 "Client/DisableDisplay|DisableInput|DisableAudio|DisableUSB=1"</computeroutput>:
2088 Disables one of the VRDE server features: Display, Input,
2089 Audio or USB respectively. To reenable a feature, use
2090 "Client/DisableDisplay=" for example. See
2091 <xref linkend="vrde-customization" />.
2092 </para>
2093 </listitem>
2094
2095 <listitem>
2096 <para>
2097 <computeroutput>--vrdeproperty
2098 "Client/DisableClipboard|DisableUpstreamAudio=1"</computeroutput>:
2099 Disables one of the VRDE server features: Clipboard or
2100 UpstreamAudio respectively. To reenable a feature, use
2101 "Client/DisableClipboard=" for example. See
2102 <xref linkend="vrde-customization" />.
2103 </para>
2104 </listitem>
2105
2106 <listitem>
2107 <para>
2108 <computeroutput>--vrdeproperty
2109 "Client/DisableRDPDR=1"</computeroutput>: Disables the VRDE
2110 server feature: RDP device redirection for smart cards. To
2111 reenable this feature, use "Client/DisableRDPR=".
2112 </para>
2113 </listitem>
2114
2115 <listitem>
2116 <para>
2117 <computeroutput>--vrdeproperty
2118 "H3DRedirect/Enabled=1"</computeroutput>: Enables the VRDE
2119 server feature: 3D redirection. To disable this feature, use
2120 "H3DRedirect/Enabled=".
2121 </para>
2122 </listitem>
2123
2124 <listitem>
2125 <para>
2126 <computeroutput>--vrdeproperty
2127 "Security/Method|ServerCertificate|ServerPrivateKey|CACertificate=&lt;value&gt;"</computeroutput>:
2128 Sets the desired security method and path of server
2129 certificate, path of server private key, path of CA
2130 certificate, that are used for a connection.
2131 </para>
2132
2133 <itemizedlist>
2134
2135 <listitem>
2136 <para>
2137 <computeroutput>--vrdeproperty
2138 "Security/Method=&lt;value&gt;"</computeroutput> sets
2139 the desired security method, which is used for a
2140 connection. Valid values are:
2141 </para>
2142
2143 <itemizedlist>
2144
2145 <listitem>
2146 <para>
2147 <computeroutput>Negotiate</computeroutput>: Both
2148 Enhanced (TLS) and Standard RDP Security connections
2149 are allowed. The security method is negotiated with
2150 the client. This is the default setting.
2151 </para>
2152 </listitem>
2153
2154 <listitem>
2155 <para>
2156 <computeroutput>RDP</computeroutput>: Only Standard
2157 RDP Security is accepted.
2158 </para>
2159 </listitem>
2160
2161 <listitem>
2162 <para>
2163 <computeroutput>TLS</computeroutput>: Only Enhanced
2164 RDP Security is accepted. The client must support
2165 TLS.
2166 </para>
2167 </listitem>
2168
2169 </itemizedlist>
2170
2171 <para>
2172 See <xref linkend="vrde-crypt" />.
2173 </para>
2174 </listitem>
2175
2176 <listitem>
2177 <para>
2178 <computeroutput>--vrdeproperty
2179 "Security/ServerCertificate=&lt;value&gt;"</computeroutput>
2180 where &lt;value&gt; is the absolute path of the server
2181 certificate. See <xref linkend="vrde-crypt" />.
2182 </para>
2183 </listitem>
2184
2185 <listitem>
2186 <para>
2187 <computeroutput>--vrdeproperty
2188 "Security/ServerPrivateKey=&lt;value&gt;"</computeroutput>
2189 where &lt;value&gt; is the absolute path of the server
2190 private key. See <xref linkend="vrde-crypt" />.
2191 </para>
2192 </listitem>
2193
2194 <listitem>
2195 <para>
2196 <computeroutput>--vrdeproperty
2197 "Security/CACertificate=&lt;value&gt;"</computeroutput>
2198 where &lt;value&gt; is the absolute path of the CA self
2199 signed certificate. See <xref linkend="vrde-crypt" />.
2200 </para>
2201 </listitem>
2202
2203 </itemizedlist>
2204 </listitem>
2205
2206 <listitem>
2207 <para>
2208 <computeroutput>--vrdeproperty
2209 "Audio/RateCorrectionMode|LogPath=&lt;value&gt;"</computeroutput>
2210 sets the audio connection mode, or path of the audio
2211 logfile.
2212 </para>
2213
2214 <itemizedlist>
2215
2216 <listitem>
2217 <para>
2218 <computeroutput>--vrdeproperty
2219 "Audio/RateCorrectionMode=&lt;value&gt;"</computeroutput>
2220 where &lt;value&gt; is the desired rate correction mode.
2221 Allowed values are:
2222 </para>
2223
2224 <itemizedlist>
2225
2226 <listitem>
2227 <para>
2228 <computeroutput>VRDP_AUDIO_MODE_VOID</computeroutput>:
2229 No mode specified, use to unset any Audio mode
2230 already set.
2231 </para>
2232 </listitem>
2233
2234 <listitem>
2235 <para>
2236 <computeroutput>VRDP_AUDIO_MODE_RC</computeroutput>:
2237 Rate correction mode.
2238 </para>
2239 </listitem>
2240
2241 <listitem>
2242 <para>
2243 <computeroutput>VRDP_AUDIO_MODE_LPF</computeroutput>:
2244 Low pass filter mode.
2245 </para>
2246 </listitem>
2247
2248 <listitem>
2249 <para>
2250 <computeroutput>VRDP_AUDIO_MODE_CS</computeroutput>:
2251 Client sync mode to prevent underflow or overflow of
2252 the client queue.
2253 </para>
2254 </listitem>
2255
2256 </itemizedlist>
2257 </listitem>
2258
2259 <listitem>
2260 <para>
2261 <computeroutput>--vrdeproperty
2262 "Audio/LogPath=&lt;value&gt;"</computeroutput> where
2263 &lt;value&gt; is the absolute path of the Audio log
2264 file.
2265 </para>
2266 </listitem>
2267
2268 </itemizedlist>
2269 </listitem>
2270
2271 <listitem>
2272 <para>
2273 <computeroutput>--vrdeextpack
2274 default|&lt;name&gt;</computeroutput>: Specifies the library
2275 to use for accessing the VM remotely. The default is to use
2276 the RDP code which is part of the &product-name; Extension
2277 Pack.
2278 </para>
2279 </listitem>
2280
2281 <listitem>
2282 <para>
2283 <computeroutput>--vrdeport
2284 default|&lt;ports&gt;</computeroutput>: A port or a range of
2285 ports the VRDE server can bind to.
2286 <computeroutput>default</computeroutput> or
2287 <computeroutput>0</computeroutput> means port 3389, the
2288 standard port for RDP. You can specify a comma-separated
2289 list of ports or ranges of ports. Use a dash between two
2290 port numbers to specify a range. The VRDE server will bind
2291 to <emphasis>one</emphasis> of the available ports from the
2292 specified list. Only one machine can use a given port at a
2293 time. For example, the option <computeroutput> --vrdeport
2294 5000,5010-5012</computeroutput> will tell the server to bind
2295 to one of following ports: 5000, 5010, 5011, or 5012.
2296 </para>
2297 </listitem>
2298
2299 <listitem>
2300 <para>
2301 <computeroutput>--vrdeaddress &lt;IP
2302 address&gt;</computeroutput>: The IP address of the host
2303 network interface the VRDE server will bind to. If
2304 specified, the server will accept connections only on the
2305 specified host network interface.
2306 </para>
2307
2308 <para>
2309 The setting can be used to specify whether the VRDP server
2310 should accept either IPv4, IPv6, or both connections:
2311 </para>
2312
2313 <itemizedlist>
2314
2315 <listitem>
2316 <para>
2317 Only IPv4: <computeroutput>--vrdeaddress
2318 "0.0.0.0"</computeroutput>
2319 </para>
2320 </listitem>
2321
2322 <listitem>
2323 <para>
2324 Only IPv6: <computeroutput>--vrdeaddress
2325 "::"</computeroutput>
2326 </para>
2327 </listitem>
2328
2329 <listitem>
2330 <para>
2331 Both IPv6 and IPv4: <computeroutput>--vrdeaddress
2332 ""</computeroutput>
2333 </para>
2334
2335 <para>
2336 This is the default setting.
2337 </para>
2338 </listitem>
2339
2340 </itemizedlist>
2341 </listitem>
2342
2343 <listitem>
2344 <para>
2345 <computeroutput>--vrdeauthtype
2346 null|external|guest</computeroutput>: Enables you to
2347 indicate use of authorization, and specify how authorization
2348 will be performed. See <xref linkend="vbox-auth" />.
2349 </para>
2350 </listitem>
2351
2352 <listitem>
2353 <para>
2354 <computeroutput>--vrdeauthlibrary
2355 default|&lt;name&gt;</computeroutput>: Specifies the library
2356 used for RDP authentication. See
2357 <xref linkend="vbox-auth" />.
2358 </para>
2359 </listitem>
2360
2361 <listitem>
2362 <para>
2363 <computeroutput>--vrdemulticon on|off</computeroutput>:
2364 Enables multiple connections to be made to the same VRDE
2365 server, if the server supports this feature. See
2366 <xref linkend="vrde-multiconnection" />.
2367 </para>
2368 </listitem>
2369
2370 <listitem>
2371 <para>
2372 <computeroutput>--vrdereusecon on|off</computeroutput>: This
2373 specifies the VRDE server behavior when multiple connections
2374 are disabled. When this option is enabled, the server will
2375 allow a new client to connect and will drop the existing
2376 connection. When this option is disabled, the default
2377 setting, a new connection will not be accepted if there is
2378 already a client connected to the server.
2379 </para>
2380 </listitem>
2381
2382 <listitem>
2383 <para>
2384 <computeroutput>--vrdevideochannel on|off</computeroutput>:
2385 Enables video redirection, if it is supported by the VRDE
2386 server. See <xref linkend="vrde-videochannel" />.
2387 </para>
2388 </listitem>
2389
2390 <listitem>
2391 <para>
2392 <computeroutput>--vrdevideochannelquality
2393 &lt;percent&gt;</computeroutput>: Specifies the image
2394 quality for video redirection. See
2395 <xref linkend="vrde-videochannel" />.
2396 </para>
2397 </listitem>
2398
2399 </itemizedlist>
2400
2401 </sect2>
2402
2403 <sect2 id="vboxmanage-modifyvm-teleport">
2404
2405 <title>Teleporting Settings</title>
2406
2407 <para>
2408 With the following commands for <command>VBoxManage
2409 modifyvm</command> you can configure a machine to be a target
2410 for teleporting. See <xref linkend="teleporting" />.
2411 </para>
2412
2413 <itemizedlist>
2414
2415 <listitem>
2416 <para>
2417 <computeroutput>--teleporter on|off</computeroutput>:
2418 Enables and disables the teleporter feature whereby when the
2419 machine is started, it waits to receive a teleporting
2420 request from the network instead of booting normally.
2421 Teleporting requests are received on the port and address
2422 specified using the following parameters.
2423 </para>
2424 </listitem>
2425
2426 <listitem>
2427 <para>
2428 <computeroutput>--teleporterport
2429 &lt;port&gt;</computeroutput>,
2430 <computeroutput>--teleporteraddress
2431 &lt;address&gt;</computeroutput>: These settings must be
2432 used with <computeroutput>--teleporter</computeroutput>.
2433 They specify the port and address the virtual machine should
2434 listen to in order to receive a teleporting request sent
2435 from another virtual machine.
2436 <computeroutput>&lt;port&gt;</computeroutput> can be any
2437 free TCP/IP port number, such as 6000.
2438 <computeroutput>&lt;address&gt;</computeroutput> can be any
2439 IP address or hostname and specifies the TCP/IP socket to
2440 bind to. The default is 0.0.0.0, which means any address.
2441 </para>
2442 </listitem>
2443
2444 <listitem>
2445 <para>
2446 <computeroutput>--teleporterpassword
2447 &lt;password&gt;</computeroutput>: If this optional setting
2448 is used, then the teleporting request will only succeed if
2449 the source machine specifies the same password as the one
2450 given with this command.
2451 </para>
2452 </listitem>
2453
2454 <listitem>
2455 <para>
2456 <computeroutput>--teleporterpasswordfile
2457 &lt;password&gt;</computeroutput>: If this optional setting
2458 is used, then the teleporting request will only succeed if
2459 the source machine specifies the same password as the one
2460 specified in the file give with this command. Use
2461 <computeroutput>stdin</computeroutput> to read the password
2462 from stdin.
2463 </para>
2464 </listitem>
2465
2466 <listitem>
2467 <para>
2468 <computeroutput>--cpuid &lt;leaf&gt; &lt;eax&gt; &lt;ebx&gt;
2469 &lt;ecx&gt; &lt;edx&gt;</computeroutput>: Advanced users can
2470 use this setting before a teleporting operation, to restrict
2471 the virtual CPU capabilities that &product-name; presents to
2472 the guest operating system. This must be run on both the
2473 source and the target machines involved in the teleporting
2474 and will then modify what the guest sees when it executes
2475 the <computeroutput>CPUID</computeroutput> machine
2476 instruction. This might help with misbehaving applications
2477 that wrongly assume that certain CPU capabilities are
2478 present. The meaning of the parameters is hardware
2479 dependent, refer to the AMD or Intel processor
2480 documentation.
2481 </para>
2482 </listitem>
2483
2484 </itemizedlist>
2485
2486 </sect2>
2487
2488 <sect2 id="vboxmanage-modifyvm-debugging">
2489
2490 <title>Debugging Settings</title>
2491
2492 <para>
2493 The following settings are only relevant for low-level VM
2494 debugging. Regular users will never need these settings.
2495 </para>
2496
2497 <itemizedlist>
2498
2499 <listitem>
2500 <para>
2501 <computeroutput>--tracing-enabled on|off</computeroutput>:
2502 Enables the tracebuffer. This consumes some memory for the
2503 tracebuffer and adds extra overhead.
2504 </para>
2505 </listitem>
2506
2507 <listitem>
2508 <para>
2509 <computeroutput>--tracing-config
2510 &lt;config-string&gt;</computeroutput>: Enables tracing
2511 configuration. In particular, this defines which group of
2512 tracepoints are enabled.
2513 </para>
2514 </listitem>
2515
2516 <listitem>
2517 <para>
2518 <computeroutput>--tracing-allow-vm-access
2519 on|off</computeroutput>: Enables and disables VM access to
2520 the tracebuffer. By default, this setting is disabled.
2521 </para>
2522 </listitem>
2523
2524 </itemizedlist>
2525
2526 </sect2>
2527
2528 <sect2 id="vboxmanage-usbcardreader">
2529
2530 <title>USB Card Reader Settings</title>
2531
2532 <para>
2533 The following setting defines access to a USB Card Reader by the
2534 guest environment. USB card readers are typically used for
2535 accessing data on memory cards such as CompactFlash (CF), Secure
2536 Digital (SD), or MultiMediaCard (MMC).
2537 </para>
2538
2539 <itemizedlist>
2540
2541 <listitem>
2542 <para>
2543 <computeroutput>--usbcardreader on|off</computeroutput>:
2544 Enables and disables the USB card reader interface.
2545 </para>
2546 </listitem>
2547
2548 </itemizedlist>
2549
2550 </sect2>
2551
2552 <sect2 id="vboxmanage-autostart">
2553
2554 <title>Autostarting VMs During Host System Boot</title>
2555
2556 <para>
2557 These settings configure the VM autostart feature, which
2558 automatically starts the VM at host system boot-up. Note that
2559 there are prerequisites that need to be addressed before using
2560 this feature. See <xref linkend="autostart" />.
2561 </para>
2562
2563 <itemizedlist>
2564
2565 <listitem>
2566 <para>
2567 <computeroutput>--autostart-enabled on|off</computeroutput>:
2568 Enables and disables VM autostart at host system boot-up,
2569 using the specified user name.
2570 </para>
2571 </listitem>
2572
2573 <listitem>
2574 <para>
2575 <computeroutput>--autostart-delay
2576 &lt;seconds&gt;</computeroutput>: Specifies a delay, in
2577 seconds, following host system boot-up, before the VM
2578 autostarts.
2579 </para>
2580 </listitem>
2581
2582 </itemizedlist>
2583
2584 </sect2>
2585
2586 </sect1>
2587
2588 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-clonevm">
2589
2590 <title>VBoxManage clonevm</title>
2591
2592 <para>
2593 The <command>VBoxManage clonevm</command> command creates a clone
2594 of an existing virtual machine (VM). The clone can be a full copy
2595 of the VM or a linked copy of a VM.
2596 </para>
2597
2598<screen>
2599VBoxManage clonevm <replaceable>vm</replaceable> [ --basefolder <replaceable>basefolder</replaceable> ]
2600[ --group <replaceable>group</replaceable>, ... ] [ --mode machine | machinechildren | all ]
2601[ --name <replaceable>name</replaceable> ] [ --options link | keepallmacs | keepnatmacs | keepdisknames | keephwuuids ]
2602[ --register ] [ --snapshot <replaceable>vm</replaceable> ] [ --uuid <replaceable>uuid</replaceable> ]
2603</screen>
2604
2605 <para>
2606 In addition to specifying the name of the VM to clone, which is
2607 required, you can specify any of the following options:
2608 </para>
2609
2610 <itemizedlist>
2611
2612 <listitem>
2613 <para>
2614 <option>--basefolder</option>
2615 <replaceable>basefolder</replaceable> specifies the name of
2616 the folder in which to save the configuration for the new VM.
2617 </para>
2618 </listitem>
2619
2620 <listitem>
2621 <para>
2622 <option>--groups <replaceable>group</replaceable>,
2623 ...</option> assigns the clone to the specified group or
2624 groups. If you specify more than one group, separate each
2625 group name with a comma.
2626 </para>
2627
2628 <para>
2629 Note that each group is identified by a group ID that starts
2630 with a slash character (<computeroutput>/</computeroutput>) so
2631 that groups can be nested. By default, a clone is always
2632 assigned membership to the <computeroutput>/</computeroutput>
2633 group.
2634 </para>
2635 </listitem>
2636
2637 <listitem>
2638 <para>
2639 <option>--mode machine|machineandchildren|all</option>
2640 specifies which of the following cloning modes to use:
2641 </para>
2642
2643 <itemizedlist>
2644
2645 <listitem>
2646 <para>
2647 <computeroutput>machine</computeroutput> mode clones the
2648 current state of the existing VM without any snapshots.
2649 This is the default mode.
2650 </para>
2651 </listitem>
2652
2653 <listitem>
2654 <para>
2655 <computeroutput>machineandchildren</computeroutput> mode
2656 clones the snapshot specified by by the
2657 <option>--snapshot</option> option and all child
2658 snapshots.
2659 </para>
2660 </listitem>
2661
2662 <listitem>
2663 <para>
2664 <computeroutput>all</computeroutput> mode clones all
2665 snapshots and the current state of the existing VM.
2666 </para>
2667 </listitem>
2668
2669 </itemizedlist>
2670 </listitem>
2671
2672 <listitem>
2673 <para>
2674 <option>--name <replaceable>name</replaceable></option>
2675 specifies a new name for the new VM. The default value is
2676 "<replaceable>name</replaceable> Clone", where
2677 <replaceable>name</replaceable> is the original name of the
2678 VM.
2679 </para>
2680 </listitem>
2681
2682 <listitem>
2683 <para>
2684 <option>--options</option> specifies how to create a new
2685 clone.
2686 </para>
2687
2688 <itemizedlist>
2689
2690 <listitem>
2691 <para>
2692 <option>--options link</option> creates a linked clone,
2693 which can be cloned only from a snapshot.
2694 </para>
2695 </listitem>
2696
2697 <listitem>
2698 <para>
2699 <option>--options keepallmacs</option> specifies that the
2700 new clone reuses the MAC addresses of each virtual network
2701 card from the existing VM.
2702 </para>
2703
2704 <para>
2705 If you do not specify this option or the <option>--options
2706 keepnatmacs</option> option, the default behavior is to
2707 reinitialize the MAC addresses of each virtual network
2708 card.
2709 </para>
2710 </listitem>
2711
2712 <listitem>
2713 <para>
2714 <option>--options keepnatmacs</option> specifies that the
2715 new clone reuses the MAC addresses of each virtual network
2716 card from the existing VM when the network type is NAT.
2717 </para>
2718
2719 <para>
2720 If you do not specify this option or the <option>--options
2721 keepallmacs</option> option, the default behavior is to
2722 reinitialize the MAC addresses of each virtual network
2723 card.
2724 </para>
2725 </listitem>
2726
2727 <listitem>
2728 <para>
2729 <option>--option keepdisknames</option> specifies that the
2730 new clone reuses the disk image names from the existing
2731 VM. By default, disk images are renamed. You can preserve
2732 source hardware IDs by adding
2733 <computeroutput>keephwuuids</computeroutput>.
2734 </para>
2735 </listitem>
2736
2737 <listitem>
2738 <para>
2739 <option>--option keephwuuids</option> specifies that the
2740 new clone reuses the hardware IDs from the existing VM. By
2741 default, new UUIDs are used.
2742 </para>
2743 </listitem>
2744
2745 </itemizedlist>
2746 </listitem>
2747
2748 <listitem>
2749 <para>
2750 <option>--register</option> automatically registers the new
2751 clone in this &product-name; installation. You can manually
2752 register the new VM later by using the <command>VBoxManage
2753 registervm</command> command. See
2754 <xref linkend="vboxmanage-registervm" />.
2755 </para>
2756 </listitem>
2757
2758 <listitem>
2759 <para>
2760 <option>--snapshot <replaceable>vm</replaceable></option>
2761 specifies the snapshot on which to base the new VM. By
2762 default, the clone is created from the current state of the
2763 specified VM.
2764 </para>
2765 </listitem>
2766
2767 <listitem>
2768 <para>
2769 <option>--uuid <replaceable>uuid</replaceable></option>
2770 specifies the UUID for the new VM. Ensure that this ID is
2771 unique for the &product-name; instance if you decide to
2772 register this new VM. By default, &product-name; provides a
2773 new UUID.
2774 </para>
2775 </listitem>
2776
2777 </itemizedlist>
2778
2779 </sect1>
2780
2781 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-movevm">
2782
2783 <title>VBoxManage movevm</title>
2784
2785 <para>
2786 This command moves a virtual machine to a new location on the
2787 host.
2788 </para>
2789
2790 <para>
2791 Associated files of the virtual machine, such as settings files
2792 and disk image files, are moved to the new location. The
2793 &product-name; configuration is updated automatically.
2794 </para>
2795
2796 <para>
2797 The <command>movevm</command> subcommand requires the name of the
2798 virtual machine which should be moved.
2799 </para>
2800
2801 <para>
2802 Also required is the type of move operation, specified by
2803 <computeroutput>--type basic</computeroutput>. Other types of move
2804 operation may be supported in future releases.
2805 </para>
2806
2807 <para>
2808 The <computeroutput>--folder</computeroutput> setting configures
2809 the new location on the host file system. Enter a relative
2810 pathname or a full pathname.
2811 </para>
2812
2813 </sect1>
2814
2815 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-import">
2816
2817 <title>VBoxManage import</title>
2818
2819 <para>
2820 This command imports a virtual appliance in OVF format by copying
2821 the virtual disk images and creating virtual machines in
2822 &product-name;. See <xref linkend="ovf" /> for an introduction to
2823 appliances.
2824 </para>
2825
2826 <para>
2827 The <command>import</command> subcommand takes at least the path
2828 name of an OVF file as input and expects the disk images, if
2829 needed, in the same directory as the OVF file. A lot of additional
2830 command-line options are supported to control in detail what is
2831 being imported and modify the import parameters, but the details
2832 depend on the content of the OVF file.
2833 </para>
2834
2835 <para>
2836 It is therefore recommended to first run the
2837 <command>import</command> subcommand with the
2838 <computeroutput>--dry-run</computeroutput> or
2839 <computeroutput>-n</computeroutput> option. This will then print a
2840 description of the appliance's contents to the screen how it would
2841 be imported into &product-name;, together with the optional
2842 command-line options to influence the import behavior.
2843 </para>
2844
2845 <para>
2846 Use of the <computeroutput>--options
2847 keepallmacs|keepnatmacs|keepdisknames</computeroutput> option
2848 enables additional fine tuning of the clone operation. The first
2849 two options enable specification of how the MAC addresses of every
2850 virtual network card should be handled. They can either be
2851 reinitialized, which is the default setting, left unchanged
2852 (<computeroutput>keepallmacs</computeroutput>) or left unchanged
2853 when the network type is NAT
2854 (<computeroutput>keepnatmacs</computeroutput>). If you add
2855 <computeroutput>keepdisknames</computeroutput> all new disk images
2856 are assigned the same names as the originals, otherwise they are
2857 renamed.
2858 </para>
2859
2860 <para>
2861 As an example, the following is a screen output for a sample
2862 appliance containing a Windows XP guest:
2863 </para>
2864
2865<screen>VBoxManage import WindowsXp.ovf --dry-run
2866Interpreting WindowsXp.ovf...
2867OK.
2868Virtual system 0:
2869 0: Suggested OS type: "WindowsXP"
2870 (change with "--vsys 0 --ostype &lt;type&gt;"; use "list ostypes" to list all)
2871 1: Suggested VM name "Windows XP Professional_1"
2872 (change with "--vsys 0 --vmname &lt;name&gt;")
2873 2: Suggested VM group "/"
2874 (change with "--vsys 0 --group &lt;group&gt;")
2875 3: Suggested VM settings file name "/home/klaus/VirtualBox VMs/dummy2 2/dummy2 2.vbox"
2876 (change with "--vsys 0 --settingsfile &lt;filename&gt;")
2877 4: Suggested VM base folder "/home/klaus/VirtualBox VMs"
2878 (change with "--vsys 0 --basefolder &lt;path&gt;")
2879 5: End-user license agreement
2880 (display with "--vsys 0 --eula show";
2881 accept with "--vsys 0 --eula accept")
2882 6: Number of CPUs: 1
2883 (change with "--vsys 0 --cpus &lt;n&gt;")
2884 7: Guest memory: 956 MB (change with "--vsys 0 --memory &lt;MB&gt;")
2885 8: Sound card (appliance expects "ensoniq1371", can change on import)
2886 (disable with "--vsys 0 --unit 5 --ignore")
2887 9: USB controller
2888 (disable with "--vsys 0 --unit 6 --ignore")
288910: Network adapter: orig bridged, config 2, extra type=bridged
289011: Floppy
2891 (disable with "--vsys 0 --unit 8 --ignore")
289212: SCSI controller, type BusLogic
2893 (change with "--vsys 0 --unit 9 --scsitype {BusLogic|LsiLogic}";
2894 disable with "--vsys 0 --unit 9 --ignore")
289513: IDE controller, type PIIX4
2896 (disable with "--vsys 0 --unit 10 --ignore")
289714: Hard disk image: source image=WindowsXp.vmdk,
2898 target path=/home/user/disks/WindowsXp.vmdk, controller=9;channel=0
2899 (change controller with "--vsys 0 --unit 11 --controller &lt;id&gt;";
2900 disable with "--vsys 0 --unit 11 --ignore")</screen>
2901
2902 <para>
2903 The individual configuration items are numbered, and depending on
2904 their type support different command-line options. The import
2905 subcommand can be directed to ignore many such items with a
2906 <computeroutput>--vsys X --unit Y --ignore</computeroutput>
2907 option, where X is the number of the virtual system and Y the item
2908 number, as printed on the screen. X is zero, unless there are
2909 several virtual system descriptions in the appliance.
2910 </para>
2911
2912 <para>
2913 In the above example, Item #1 specifies the name of the target
2914 machine in &product-name;. Items #9 and #10 specify hard disk
2915 controllers, respectively. Item #11 describes a hard disk image.
2916 In this case, the additional
2917 <computeroutput>--controller</computeroutput> option indicates
2918 which item the disk image should be connected to, with the default
2919 coming from the OVF file.
2920 </para>
2921
2922 <para>
2923 You can combine several items for the same virtual system behind
2924 the same <computeroutput>--vsys</computeroutput> option. For
2925 example, to import a machine as described in the OVF, but without
2926 the sound card and without the USB controller, and with the disk
2927 image connected to the IDE controller instead of the SCSI
2928 controller, use the following command:
2929 </para>
2930
2931<screen>VBoxManage import WindowsXp.ovf
2932 --vsys 0 --unit 5 --ignore --unit 6 --ignore --unit 11 --controller 10</screen>
2933
2934 </sect1>
2935
2936 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-export">
2937
2938 <title>VBoxManage export</title>
2939
2940 <para>
2941 This command exports one or more virtual machines from
2942 &product-name;. You can export to either of the following:
2943 </para>
2944
2945 <itemizedlist>
2946
2947 <listitem>
2948 <para>
2949 A virtual appliance in OVF format, including copying their
2950 virtual disk images to compressed VMDK.
2951 </para>
2952 </listitem>
2953
2954 <listitem>
2955 <para>
2956 A cloud service, such as &oci;. A single VM can be exported in
2957 VMDK format.
2958 </para>
2959 </listitem>
2960
2961 </itemizedlist>
2962
2963 <para>
2964 See <xref linkend="ovf" /> for more details on exporting VMs from
2965 &product-name;.
2966 </para>
2967
2968 <sect2 id="vboxmanage-export-ovf">
2969
2970 <title>Export to OVF</title>
2971
2972 <para>
2973 List the machine, or the machines, that you would like to export
2974 to the same OVF file and specify the target OVF file after an
2975 additional <computeroutput>--output</computeroutput> or
2976 <computeroutput>-o</computeroutput> option. Note that the
2977 directory of the target OVF file will also receive the exported
2978 disk images in the compressed VMDK format, regardless of the
2979 original format, and should have enough disk space left for
2980 them.
2981 </para>
2982
2983 <para>
2984 Beside a simple export of a given virtual machine, you can
2985 append several product information to the appliance file. Use
2986 <computeroutput>--product</computeroutput>,
2987 <computeroutput>--producturl</computeroutput>,
2988 <computeroutput>--vendor</computeroutput>,
2989 <computeroutput>--vendorurl</computeroutput>,
2990 <computeroutput>--version</computeroutput> and
2991 <computeroutput>--description</computeroutput> to specify this
2992 additional information. For legal reasons you may add a license
2993 text or the content of a license file by using the
2994 <computeroutput>--eula</computeroutput> and
2995 <computeroutput>--eulafile</computeroutput> option respectively.
2996 </para>
2997
2998 <para>
2999 As with OVF import, you use the <computeroutput>--vsys
3000 X</computeroutput> option to apply these options to the correct
3001 virtual machine.
3002 </para>
3003
3004 <para>
3005 For virtualization products which are not fully compatible with
3006 the OVF standard 1.0 you can enable an OVF 0.9 legacy mode with
3007 the <computeroutput>--legacy09</computeroutput> option. Other
3008 options are <computeroutput>--ovf09</computeroutput>,
3009 <computeroutput>--ovf10</computeroutput>,
3010 <computeroutput>--ovf20</computeroutput>.
3011 </para>
3012
3013 <para>
3014 To specify options controlling the exact content of the
3015 appliance file, you can use <option>--options</option> to
3016 request the creation of a manifest file, which enables detection
3017 of corrupted appliances on import, the additional export of DVD
3018 images, and the exclusion of MAC addresses. You can specify a
3019 list of options, such as <option>--options
3020 manifest,nomacs</option>. For details, check the help output of
3021 <command>VBoxManage export</command>.
3022 </para>
3023
3024 </sect2>
3025
3026 <sect2 id="vboxmanage-export-cloud">
3027
3028 <title>Export to &oci;</title>
3029
3030 <para>
3031 By default, an exported disk image is converted into stream VMDK
3032 format. This ensures compatibility with &oci;.
3033 </para>
3034
3035 <para>
3036 List the machine that you want to export to &oci; and specify
3037 the target cloud service provider by using the
3038 <computeroutput>--output</computeroutput> or
3039 <computeroutput>-o</computeroutput> option.
3040 </para>
3041
3042 <para>
3043 To export a VM to a cloud service such as &oci;, use the
3044 <option>--cloud</option> option to specify the VM to export.
3045 This option works in the same way as the <option>--vsys</option>
3046 option for OVF export.
3047 </para>
3048
3049 <para>
3050 Some of the following options are settings for the VM instance.
3051 As a result, you must enter an Oracle Cloud Identifier (OCID)
3052 for a resource. Use the &oci; Console to view OCIDs.
3053 </para>
3054
3055 <itemizedlist>
3056
3057 <listitem>
3058 <para>
3059 <option>--output/-o</option>: Specifies the short name of
3060 the cloud service provider to which you export. For &oci;,
3061 enter <computeroutput>OCI://</computeroutput>.
3062 </para>
3063 </listitem>
3064
3065 <listitem>
3066 <para>
3067 <option>--cloud</option>
3068 <replaceable>number-of-virtual-system</replaceable>:
3069 Specifies a number that identifies the VM that you are
3070 exporting. Numbering starts at
3071 <computeroutput>0</computeroutput> for the first VM.
3072 </para>
3073 </listitem>
3074
3075 <listitem>
3076 <para>
3077 <option>--vmname</option> <replaceable>name</replaceable>:
3078 Specifies the name of the exported VM. This name is used as
3079 the VM instance name in &oci;.
3080 </para>
3081 </listitem>
3082
3083 <listitem>
3084 <para>
3085 <option>--cloudprofile</option>
3086 <replaceable>cloud-profile-name</replaceable>: Specifies the
3087 cloud profile that is used to connect to the cloud service
3088 provider. The cloud profile contains your &oci; account
3089 details, such as your user OCID and the fingerprint for your
3090 public key. See <xref linkend="ovf-export-oci"/>.
3091 </para>
3092
3093 <para>
3094 To use a cloud profile, you must have the required
3095 permissions on &oci;.
3096 </para>
3097
3098 <remark>
3099 Add xref to information about the required permissions.
3100 </remark>
3101 </listitem>
3102
3103 <listitem>
3104 <para>
3105 <option>--cloudshape</option>
3106 <replaceable>shape</replaceable>: Specifies the shape used
3107 for the VM instance. The shape defines the number of CPUs
3108 and the amount of memory allocated to the VM instance. The
3109 shape must be compatible with the exported image.
3110 </para>
3111 </listitem>
3112
3113 <listitem>
3114 <para>
3115 <option>--clouddomain</option>
3116 <replaceable>domain</replaceable>: Specifies the
3117 availability domain to use for the VM instance. Enter the
3118 OCID for the availability domain.
3119 </para>
3120 </listitem>
3121
3122 <listitem>
3123 <para>
3124 <option>--clouddisksize</option>
3125 <replaceable>disk-size-in-GB</replaceable>: Specifies the
3126 disk size used for the exported disk image in gigabytes. The
3127 minimum value is 50 GB and the maximum value is 300 GB.
3128 </para>
3129 </listitem>
3130
3131 <listitem>
3132 <para>
3133 <option>--cloudbucket</option>
3134 <replaceable>bucket-name</replaceable>: Specifies the bucket
3135 in which to store the uploaded files. In &oci;, a bucket is
3136 a logical container for storing objects.
3137 </para>
3138 </listitem>
3139
3140 <listitem>
3141 <para>
3142 <option>--cloudocivcn</option>
3143 <replaceable>OCI-vcn-ID</replaceable>: Specifies the virtual
3144 cloud network (VCN) to use for the VM instance. Enter the
3145 OCID for the VCN.
3146 </para>
3147 </listitem>
3148
3149 <listitem>
3150 <para>
3151 <option>--cloudocisubnet</option>
3152 <replaceable>OCI-subnet-ID</replaceable>: Specifies the
3153 subnet of the VCN to use for the VM instance. Enter the OCID
3154 for the subnet.
3155 </para>
3156 </listitem>
3157
3158 <listitem>
3159 <para>
3160 <option>--cloudkeepobject true | false</option>: Specifies
3161 whether to store the exported disk image in Oracle Object
3162 Storage.
3163 </para>
3164 </listitem>
3165
3166 <listitem>
3167 <para>
3168 <option>--cloudlaunchinstance true | false</option>:
3169 Specifies whether to start the VM instance after the export
3170 to &oci; completes.
3171 </para>
3172 </listitem>
3173
3174 <listitem>
3175 <para>
3176 <option>--cloudpublicip true | false</option>: Specifies
3177 whether to enable a public IP address for the VM instance.
3178 </para>
3179 </listitem>
3180
3181 </itemizedlist>
3182
3183 <para>
3184 The following example shows a typical command line for exporting
3185 a VM to &oci;.
3186 </para>
3187
3188 <remark>
3189 For the next release, describe exactly what this command does in
3190 terms of the command line options.
3191 </remark>
3192
3193<screen># VBoxManage export myVM --output OCI:// --cloud 0 --vmname myVM_Cloud \
3194--cloudprofile "standard user" --cloudbucket myBucket \
3195--cloudshape VM.Standard2.1 --clouddomain aaaa:US-ASHBURN-AD-1 --clouddisksize 50 \
3196--cloudocivcn ocid1.vcn.oc1.iad.aaaa... --cloudocisubnet ocid1.subnet.oc1.iad.aaaa... \
3197--cloudkeepobject true --cloudlaunchinstance true --cloudpublicip true</screen>
3198
3199 </sect2>
3200
3201 </sect1>
3202
3203 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-startvm">
3204
3205 <title>VBoxManage startvm</title>
3206
3207 <para>
3208 This command starts a virtual machine that is currently in the
3209 Powered Off or Saved states.
3210 </para>
3211
3212 <para>
3213 The optional <computeroutput>--type</computeroutput> specifier
3214 determines whether the machine will be started in a window or
3215 whether the output should go through
3216 <command>VBoxHeadless</command>, with VRDE enabled or not. See
3217 <xref linkend="vboxheadless" />. The list of types is subject to
3218 change, and it is not guaranteed that all types are accepted by
3219 any product variant.
3220 </para>
3221
3222 <para>
3223 The global or per-VM default value for the VM frontend type will
3224 be taken if the type is not explicitly specified. If none of these
3225 are set, the GUI variant will be started.
3226 </para>
3227
3228 <para>
3229 The following values are allowed:
3230 </para>
3231
3232 <variablelist>
3233
3234 <varlistentry>
3235 <term>
3236 <computeroutput>gui</computeroutput>
3237 </term>
3238
3239 <listitem>
3240 <para>
3241 Starts a VM showing a GUI window. This is the default.
3242 </para>
3243 </listitem>
3244 </varlistentry>
3245
3246 <varlistentry>
3247 <term>
3248 <computeroutput>headless</computeroutput>
3249 </term>
3250
3251 <listitem>
3252 <para>
3253 Starts a VM without a window for remote display only.
3254 </para>
3255 </listitem>
3256 </varlistentry>
3257
3258 <varlistentry>
3259 <term>
3260 <computeroutput>separate</computeroutput>
3261 </term>
3262
3263 <listitem>
3264 <para>
3265 Starts a VM with a detachable UI. Technically, it is a
3266 headless VM with user interface in a separate process. This
3267 is an experimental feature as it lacks certain
3268 functionality, such as 3D acceleration.
3269 </para>
3270 </listitem>
3271 </varlistentry>
3272
3273 </variablelist>
3274
3275 <note>
3276 <para>
3277 If you experience problems with starting virtual machines with
3278 particular frontends and there is no conclusive error
3279 information, consider starting virtual machines directly by
3280 running the respective front-end, as this can give additional
3281 error information.
3282 </para>
3283 </note>
3284
3285 </sect1>
3286
3287 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-controlvm">
3288
3289 <title>VBoxManage controlvm</title>
3290
3291 <para>
3292 The <command>controlvm</command> subcommand enables you to change
3293 the state of a virtual machine that is currently running. The
3294 following can be specified:
3295 </para>
3296
3297 <itemizedlist>
3298
3299 <listitem>
3300 <para>
3301 <command>VBoxManage controlvm &lt;vm&gt; pause</command>:
3302 Temporarily puts a virtual machine on hold, without
3303 permanently changing its state. The VM window is gray, to
3304 indicate that the VM is currently paused. This is equivalent
3305 to selecting the <emphasis role="bold">Pause</emphasis> item
3306 in the <emphasis role="bold">Machine</emphasis> menu of the
3307 GUI.
3308 </para>
3309 </listitem>
3310
3311 <listitem>
3312 <para>
3313 Use <command>VBoxManage controlvm &lt;vm&gt; resume</command>:
3314 Undoes a previous <command>pause</command> command. This is
3315 equivalent to selecting the
3316 <emphasis role="bold">Resume</emphasis> item in the
3317 <emphasis role="bold">Machine</emphasis> menu of the GUI.
3318 </para>
3319 </listitem>
3320
3321 <listitem>
3322 <para>
3323 <command>VBoxManage controlvm &lt;vm&gt; reset</command>: Has
3324 the same effect on a virtual machine as pressing the Reset
3325 button on a real computer. A cold reboot of the virtual
3326 machine is done, which immediately restarts and reboots the
3327 guest operating system. The state of the VM is not saved
3328 beforehand, and data may be lost. This is equivalent to
3329 selecting the <emphasis role="bold">Reset</emphasis> item in
3330 the <emphasis role="bold">Machine</emphasis> menu of the GUI.
3331 </para>
3332 </listitem>
3333
3334 <listitem>
3335 <para>
3336 <command>VBoxManage controlvm &lt;vm&gt; poweroff</command>:
3337 Has the same effect on a virtual machine as pulling the power
3338 cable on a real computer. The state of the VM is not saved
3339 beforehand, and data may be lost. This is equivalent to
3340 selecting the <emphasis role="bold">Close</emphasis> item in
3341 the <emphasis role="bold">Machine</emphasis> menu of the GUI,
3342 or clicking the VM window's close button, and then selecting
3343 <emphasis role="bold">Power Off the Machine</emphasis> in the
3344 displayed dialog.
3345 </para>
3346
3347 <para>
3348 After this, the VM's state will be Powered Off. From that
3349 state, it can be started again. See
3350 <xref
3351 linkend="vboxmanage-startvm" />.
3352 </para>
3353 </listitem>
3354
3355 <listitem>
3356 <para>
3357 <command>VBoxManage controlvm &lt;vm&gt; savestate</command>:
3358 Saves the current state of the VM to disk and then stops the
3359 VM. This is equivalent to selecting the
3360 <emphasis role="bold">Close</emphasis> item in the
3361 <emphasis role="bold">Machine</emphasis> menu of the GUI or
3362 clicking the VM window's close button, and then selecting
3363 <emphasis role="bold">Save the Machine State</emphasis> in the
3364 displayed dialog.
3365 </para>
3366
3367 <para>
3368 After this, the VM's state will be Saved. From this state, it
3369 can be started again. See
3370 <xref linkend="vboxmanage-startvm" />.
3371 </para>
3372 </listitem>
3373
3374 <listitem>
3375 <para>
3376 <command>VBoxManage controlvm &lt;vm&gt;
3377 acpipowerbutton</command>: Sends an ACPI shutdown signal to
3378 the VM, as if the power button on a real computer had been
3379 pressed. So long as the VM is running a fairly modern guest
3380 operating system providing ACPI support, this should trigger a
3381 proper shutdown mechanism from within the VM.
3382 </para>
3383 </listitem>
3384
3385 <listitem>
3386 <para>
3387 <command>VBoxManage controlvm &lt;vm&gt; keyboardputscancode
3388 &lt;hex&gt; [&lt;hex&gt;...]</command>: Sends commands using
3389 keycodes to the VM. Keycodes are documented in the public
3390 domain. For example:
3391 http://www.win.tue.nl/~aeb/linux/kbd/scancodes-1.html.
3392 </para>
3393 </listitem>
3394
3395 <listitem>
3396 <para>
3397 <command>VBoxManage controlvm "VM name" teleport --hostname
3398 &lt;name&gt; --port &lt;port&gt; [--passwordfile &lt;file&gt;
3399 | --password &lt;password&gt;]</command>: Makes the machine
3400 the source of a teleporting operation and initiates a teleport
3401 to the given target. See <xref linkend="teleporting" />. If
3402 the optional password is specified, it must match the password
3403 that was given to the <command>modifyvm</command> command for
3404 the target machine. See
3405 <xref linkend="vboxmanage-modifyvm-teleport" />.
3406 </para>
3407 </listitem>
3408
3409 </itemizedlist>
3410
3411 <para>
3412 The following extra options are available with
3413 <command>controlvm</command> that do not directly affect the VM's
3414 running state:
3415 </para>
3416
3417 <itemizedlist>
3418
3419 <listitem>
3420 <para>
3421 <computeroutput>setlinkstate&lt;1-N&gt;</computeroutput>:
3422 Connects or disconnects virtual network cables from their
3423 network interfaces.
3424 </para>
3425 </listitem>
3426
3427 <listitem>
3428 <para>
3429 <computeroutput>nic&lt;1-N&gt;
3430 null|nat|bridged|intnet|hostonly|generic|natnetwork[&lt;devicename&gt;]</computeroutput>:
3431 Specifies the type of networking that should be made available
3432 on the specified VM virtual network card. They available types
3433 are: not connected to the host
3434 (<computeroutput>null</computeroutput>), use network address
3435 translation (<computeroutput>nat</computeroutput>), bridged
3436 networking (<computeroutput>bridged</computeroutput>),
3437 communicate with other virtual machines using internal
3438 networking (<computeroutput>intnet</computeroutput>),
3439 host-only networking
3440 (<computeroutput>hostonly</computeroutput>), natnetwork
3441 networking (<computeroutput>natnetwork</computeroutput>), or
3442 access to rarely used submodes
3443 (<computeroutput>generic</computeroutput>). These options
3444 correspond to the modes which are described in detail in
3445 <xref
3446 linkend="networkingmodes" />.
3447 </para>
3448 </listitem>
3449
3450 <listitem>
3451 <para>
3452 With the <computeroutput>nictrace</computeroutput> options,
3453 you can optionally trace network traffic by dumping it to a
3454 file, for debugging purposes.
3455 </para>
3456
3457 <para>
3458 <computeroutput>nictrace&lt;1-N&gt; on|off</computeroutput>:
3459 Enables network tracing for a particular virtual network card.
3460 </para>
3461
3462 <para>
3463 If enabled, you must specify with
3464 <computeroutput>--nictracefile&lt;1-N&gt;
3465 &lt;filename&gt;</computeroutput> the pathname of the file to
3466 which the trace should be logged.
3467 </para>
3468 </listitem>
3469
3470 <listitem>
3471 <para>
3472 <computeroutput>nicpromisc&lt;1-N&gt;
3473 deny|allow-vms|allow-all</computeroutput>: Specifies how the
3474 promiscious mode is handled for the specified VM virtual
3475 network card. This setting is only relevant for bridged
3476 networking. The default setting of
3477 <computeroutput>deny</computeroutput> hides any traffic not
3478 intended for this VM.
3479 <computeroutput>allow-vms</computeroutput> hides all host
3480 traffic from this VM but enables the VM to see traffic to and
3481 from other VMs. <computeroutput>allow-all</computeroutput>
3482 removes this restriction completely.
3483 </para>
3484 </listitem>
3485
3486 <listitem>
3487 <para>
3488 <computeroutput>nicproperty&lt;1-N&gt;
3489 &lt;paramname&gt;="paramvalue"</computeroutput>: This option,
3490 in combination with
3491 <computeroutput>nicgenericdrv</computeroutput> enables you to
3492 pass parameters to rarely-used network backends.
3493 </para>
3494
3495 <para>
3496 Those parameters are backend engine-specific, and are
3497 different between UDP Tunnel and the VDE backend drivers. See
3498 <xref linkend="network_udp_tunnel" />.
3499 </para>
3500 </listitem>
3501
3502 <listitem>
3503 <para>
3504 <computeroutput>natpf&lt;1-N&gt;
3505 [&lt;name&gt;],tcp|udp,[&lt;hostip&gt;],&lt;hostport&gt;,[&lt;guestip&gt;],
3506 &lt;guestport&gt;</computeroutput>: Specifies a NAT
3507 port-forwarding rule. See <xref linkend="natforward"/>.
3508 </para>
3509 </listitem>
3510
3511 <listitem>
3512 <para>
3513 <computeroutput>natpf&lt;1-N&gt; delete
3514 &lt;name&gt;</computeroutput>: Deletes a NAT port-forwarding
3515 rule. See <xref linkend="natforward"/>.
3516 </para>
3517 </listitem>
3518
3519 <listitem>
3520 <para>
3521 The <computeroutput>guestmemoryballoon&lt;balloon size in
3522 MB&gt;</computeroutput>: Changes the size of the guest memory
3523 balloon. This is the memory allocated by the &product-name;
3524 Guest Additions from the guest operating system and returned
3525 to the hypervisor for reuse by other virtual machines. This
3526 must be specified in megabytes. See
3527 <xref linkend="guestadd-balloon" />.
3528 </para>
3529 </listitem>
3530
3531 <listitem>
3532 <para>
3533 <computeroutput>usbattach&lt;uuid|address&gt; [--capturefile
3534 &lt;filename&gt;]</computeroutput>
3535 </para>
3536
3537 <para>
3538 and <computeroutput>usbdetach &lt;uuid|address&gt;
3539 [--capturefile &lt;filename&gt;]</computeroutput>: Makes host
3540 USB devices visible or invisible to the virtual machine on the
3541 fly, without the need for creating filters first. The USB
3542 devices can be specified by UUID (unique identifier) or by
3543 address on the host system. Use the
3544 <computeroutput>--capturefile</computeroutput> option to
3545 specify the absolute path of a file for writing activity
3546 logging data.
3547 </para>
3548
3549 <para>
3550 You can use <command>VBoxManage list usbhost</command> to
3551 locate this information.
3552 </para>
3553 </listitem>
3554
3555 <listitem>
3556 <para>
3557 <computeroutput>audioin on</computeroutput>: Selects whether
3558 capturing audio from the host is enabled or disabled.
3559 </para>
3560 </listitem>
3561
3562 <listitem>
3563 <para>
3564 <computeroutput>audioout on</computeroutput>: Selects whether
3565 audio playback from the guest is enabled or disabled.
3566 </para>
3567 </listitem>
3568
3569 <listitem>
3570 <para>
3571 <computeroutput>clipboard
3572 disabled|hosttoguest|guesttohost|bidirectional</computeroutput>:
3573 Selects how the guest or host operating system's clipboard
3574 should be shared with the host or guest. See
3575 <xref linkend="generalsettings" />. This requires that the
3576 Guest Additions be installed in the virtual machine.
3577 </para>
3578 </listitem>
3579
3580 <listitem>
3581 <para>
3582 <computeroutput>draganddrop
3583 disabled|hosttoguest|guesttohost|bidirectional</computeroutput>:
3584 Selects the current drag and drop mode being used between the
3585 host and the virtual machine. See
3586 <xref linkend="guestadd-dnd" />. This requires that the Guest
3587 Additions be installed in the virtual machine.
3588 </para>
3589 </listitem>
3590
3591 <listitem>
3592 <para>
3593 <computeroutput>vrde on|off</computeroutput>: Enables and
3594 disables the VRDE server, if it is installed.
3595 </para>
3596 </listitem>
3597
3598 <listitem>
3599 <para>
3600 <computeroutput>vrdeport
3601 default|&lt;ports&gt;</computeroutput>: Changes the port or a
3602 range of ports that the VRDE server can bind to.
3603 <computeroutput>default</computeroutput> or
3604 <computeroutput>0</computeroutput> means port 3389, the
3605 standard port for RDP. See the description for the
3606 <computeroutput>--vrdeport</computeroutput> option in
3607 <xref
3608 linkend="vboxmanage-modifyvm-vrde" />.
3609 </para>
3610 </listitem>
3611
3612 <listitem>
3613 <para>
3614 <computeroutput>vrdeproperty
3615 "TCP/Ports|Address=&lt;value&gt;"</computeroutput>: Sets the
3616 port numbers and IP address on the VM to which the VRDE server
3617 can bind.
3618 </para>
3619
3620 <itemizedlist>
3621
3622 <listitem>
3623 <para>
3624 For TCP/Ports, &lt;value&gt; should be a port or a range
3625 of ports to which the VRDE server can bind.
3626 <computeroutput>default</computeroutput> or
3627 <computeroutput>0</computeroutput> means port 3389, the
3628 standard port for RDP. See the description for the
3629 <computeroutput>--vrdeport</computeroutput> option in
3630 <xref
3631 linkend="vboxmanage-modifyvm-vrde" />.
3632 </para>
3633 </listitem>
3634
3635 <listitem>
3636 <para>
3637 For TCP/Address, &lt;value&gt;: The IP address of the host
3638 network interface that the VRDE server will bind to. If
3639 specified, the server will accept connections only on the
3640 specified host network interface. See the description for
3641 the <computeroutput>--vrdeaddress</computeroutput> option
3642 in
3643 <xref
3644 linkend="vboxmanage-modifyvm-vrde" />.
3645 </para>
3646 </listitem>
3647
3648 </itemizedlist>
3649 </listitem>
3650
3651 <listitem>
3652 <para>
3653 <computeroutput>vrdeproperty
3654 "VideoChannel/Enabled|Quality|DownscaleProtection=&lt;value&gt;"</computeroutput>:
3655 Sets the VRDP video redirection properties.
3656 </para>
3657
3658 <itemizedlist>
3659
3660 <listitem>
3661 <para>
3662 For VideoChannel/Enabled, &lt;value&gt; can be set to "1"
3663 switching the VRDP video channel on. See
3664 <xref linkend="vrde-videochannel" />.
3665 </para>
3666 </listitem>
3667
3668 <listitem>
3669 <para>
3670 For VideoChannel/Quality, &lt;value&gt; should be set
3671 between 10 and 100% inclusive, representing a JPEG
3672 compression level on the VRDE server video channel. Lower
3673 values mean lower quality but higher compression. See
3674 <xref linkend="vrde-videochannel" />.
3675 </para>
3676 </listitem>
3677
3678 <listitem>
3679 <para>
3680 For VideoChannel/DownscaleProtection, &lt;value&gt; can be
3681 set to "1" to enable the videochannel downscale protection
3682 feature. When enabled, if a video's size equals the shadow
3683 buffer size, then it is regarded as a full screen video,
3684 and is displayed. If its size is between fullscreen and
3685 the downscale threshold it is not displayed, as it could
3686 be an application window, which would be unreadable when
3687 downscaled. When the downscale protection feature is
3688 disabled, an attempt is always made to display videos.
3689 </para>
3690 </listitem>
3691
3692 </itemizedlist>
3693 </listitem>
3694
3695 <listitem>
3696 <para>
3697 <computeroutput>vrdeproperty
3698 "Client/DisableDisplay|DisableInput|DisableAudio|DisableUSB=1"</computeroutput>:
3699 Disables one of the VRDE server features: Display, Input,
3700 Audio, or USB. To reenable a feature, use
3701 "Client/DisableDisplay=" for example. See
3702 <xref linkend="vrde-customization" />.
3703 </para>
3704 </listitem>
3705
3706 <listitem>
3707 <para>
3708 <computeroutput>vrdeproperty
3709 "Client/DisableClipboard|DisableUpstreamAudio=1"</computeroutput>.
3710 Disables one of the VRDE server features: Clipboard or
3711 UpstreamAudio. To reenable a feature, use
3712 "Client/DisableClipboard=" for example. See
3713 <xref linkend="vrde-customization" />.
3714 </para>
3715 </listitem>
3716
3717 <listitem>
3718 <para>
3719 <computeroutput>vrdeproperty
3720 "Client/DisableRDPDR=1"</computeroutput>: Disables the VRDE
3721 server feature: RDP device redirection for smart cards. To
3722 reenable this feature, use "Client/DisableRDPR=".
3723 </para>
3724 </listitem>
3725
3726 <listitem>
3727 <para>
3728 <computeroutput>vrdeproperty
3729 "H3DRedirect/Enabled=1"</computeroutput>: Enables the VRDE
3730 server feature: 3D redirection. To disable this feature, use
3731 "H3DRedirect/Enabled=".
3732 </para>
3733 </listitem>
3734
3735 <listitem>
3736 <para>
3737 <computeroutput>vrdeproperty
3738 "Security/Method|ServerCertificate|ServerPrivateKey|CACertificate=&lt;value&gt;"</computeroutput>:
3739 Sets the desired security method, path of the server
3740 certificate, path of the server private key, and path of CA
3741 certificate, used for a connection.
3742 </para>
3743
3744 <itemizedlist>
3745
3746 <listitem>
3747 <para>
3748 <computeroutput>vrdeproperty
3749 "Security/Method=&lt;value&gt;"</computeroutput>: Sets the
3750 desired security method, which is used for a connection.
3751 Valid values are as follows:
3752 </para>
3753
3754 <itemizedlist>
3755
3756 <listitem>
3757 <para>
3758 <computeroutput>Negotiate</computeroutput>: Both
3759 Enhanced (TLS) and Standard RDP Security connections
3760 are allowed. The security method is negotiated with
3761 the client. This is the default setting.
3762 </para>
3763 </listitem>
3764
3765 <listitem>
3766 <para>
3767 <computeroutput>RDP</computeroutput>: Only Standard
3768 RDP Security is accepted.
3769 </para>
3770 </listitem>
3771
3772 <listitem>
3773 <para>
3774 <computeroutput>TLS</computeroutput>: Only Enhanced
3775 RDP Security is accepted. The client must support TLS.
3776 </para>
3777 </listitem>
3778
3779 </itemizedlist>
3780
3781 <para>
3782 See <xref linkend="vrde-crypt" />.
3783 </para>
3784 </listitem>
3785
3786 <listitem>
3787 <para>
3788 <computeroutput>vrdeproperty
3789 "Security/ServerCertificate=&lt;value&gt;"</computeroutput>
3790 where &lt;value&gt; is the absolute path of the server
3791 certificate. See <xref linkend="vrde-crypt" />.
3792 </para>
3793 </listitem>
3794
3795 <listitem>
3796 <para>
3797 <computeroutput>vrdeproperty
3798 "Security/ServerPrivateKey=&lt;value&gt;"</computeroutput>
3799 where &lt;value&gt; is the absolute path of the server
3800 private key. See <xref linkend="vrde-crypt" />.
3801 </para>
3802 </listitem>
3803
3804 <listitem>
3805 <para>
3806 <computeroutput>vrdeproperty
3807 "Security/CACertificate=&lt;value&gt;"</computeroutput>
3808 where &lt;value&gt; is the absolute path of the CA self
3809 signed certificate. See <xref linkend="vrde-crypt" />.
3810 </para>
3811 </listitem>
3812
3813 </itemizedlist>
3814 </listitem>
3815
3816 <listitem>
3817 <para>
3818 <computeroutput>vrdeproperty
3819 "Audio/RateCorrectionMode|LogPath=&lt;value&gt;"</computeroutput>:
3820 Sets the audio connection mode, or path of the audio logfile.
3821 </para>
3822
3823 <itemizedlist>
3824
3825 <listitem>
3826 <para>
3827 <computeroutput>vrdeproperty
3828 "Audio/RateCorrectionMode=&lt;value&gt;"</computeroutput>
3829 where &lt;value&gt; is the desired rate correction mode,
3830 allowed values are:
3831 </para>
3832
3833 <itemizedlist>
3834
3835 <listitem>
3836 <para>
3837 <computeroutput>VRDP_AUDIO_MODE_VOID</computeroutput>:
3838 No mode specified, use to unset any Audio mode already
3839 set.
3840 </para>
3841 </listitem>
3842
3843 <listitem>
3844 <para>
3845 <computeroutput>VRDP_AUDIO_MODE_RC</computeroutput>:
3846 Rate correction mode.
3847 </para>
3848 </listitem>
3849
3850 <listitem>
3851 <para>
3852 <computeroutput>VRDP_AUDIO_MODE_LPF</computeroutput>:
3853 Low pass filter mode.
3854 </para>
3855 </listitem>
3856
3857 <listitem>
3858 <para>
3859 <computeroutput>VRDP_AUDIO_MODE_CS</computeroutput>:
3860 Client sync mode to prevent underflow or overflow of
3861 the client queue.
3862 </para>
3863 </listitem>
3864
3865 </itemizedlist>
3866 </listitem>
3867
3868 <listitem>
3869 <para>
3870 <computeroutput>vrdeproperty
3871 "Audio/LogPath=&lt;value&gt;"</computeroutput> where
3872 &lt;value&gt; is the absolute path of the audio log file.
3873 </para>
3874 </listitem>
3875
3876 </itemizedlist>
3877 </listitem>
3878
3879 <listitem>
3880 <para>
3881 <computeroutput>vrdevideochannelquality
3882 &lt;percent&gt;</computeroutput>: Sets the image quality for
3883 video redirection. See <xref linkend="vrde-videochannel" />.
3884 </para>
3885 </listitem>
3886
3887 <listitem>
3888 <para>
3889 <computeroutput>setvideomodehint</computeroutput>: Requests
3890 that the guest system change to a particular video mode. This
3891 requires that the Guest Additions be installed, and will not
3892 work for all guest systems.
3893 </para>
3894 </listitem>
3895
3896 <listitem>
3897 <para>
3898 <computeroutput>screenshotpng</computeroutput>: Takes a
3899 screenshot of the guest display and saves it in PNG format.
3900 </para>
3901 </listitem>
3902
3903 <listitem>
3904 <para>
3905 <computeroutput>recording on|off</computeroutput> enables or
3906 disables the recording of a VM session into a WebM/VP8 file.
3907 When this option value is <computeroutput>on</computeroutput>,
3908 recording begins when the VM session starts.
3909 </para>
3910 </listitem>
3911
3912 <listitem>
3913 <para>
3914 <computeroutput>recordingscreens
3915 all|<replaceable>screen-ID</replaceable>
3916 [<replaceable>screen-ID</replaceable> ...]</computeroutput>
3917 enables you to specify which VM screens to record. The
3918 recording for each screen that you specify is saved to its own
3919 file. You cannot modify this setting while recording is
3920 enabled.
3921 </para>
3922 </listitem>
3923
3924 <listitem>
3925 <para>
3926 <computeroutput>recordingfile
3927 <replaceable>filename</replaceable></computeroutput> specifies
3928 the file in which to save the recording. You cannot modify
3929 this setting while recording is enabled.
3930 </para>
3931 </listitem>
3932
3933 <listitem>
3934 <para>
3935 <computeroutput>recordingvideores
3936 <replaceable>width</replaceable>x<replaceable>height</replaceable></computeroutput>
3937 specifies the resolution of the recorded video in pixels. You
3938 cannot modify this setting while recording is enabled.
3939 </para>
3940 </listitem>
3941
3942 <listitem>
3943<!-- @todo r=andy Clarify rate. -->
3944
3945 <para>
3946 <computeroutput>recordingvideorate
3947 <replaceable>bit-rate</replaceable></computeroutput> specifies
3948 the bit rate of the video in kilobits per second. Increasing
3949 this value improves the appearance of the video at the cost of
3950 an increased file size. You cannot modify this setting while
3951 recording is enabled.
3952 </para>
3953 </listitem>
3954
3955 <listitem>
3956 <para>
3957 <computeroutput>recordingvideofps
3958 <replaceable>fps</replaceable></computeroutput> specifies the
3959 maximum number of video frames per second (FPS) to record.
3960 Frames that have a higher frequency are skipped. Increasing
3961 this value reduces the number of skipped frames and increases
3962 the file size. You cannot modify this setting while recording
3963 is enabled.
3964 </para>
3965 </listitem>
3966
3967 <listitem>
3968<!-- @todo r=andy Clarify time format. -->
3969
3970 <para>
3971 <computeroutput>recordingmaxtime
3972 <replaceable>seconds</replaceable></computeroutput> specifies
3973 the maximum amount time to record in seconds. The recording
3974 stops after the specified number of seconds elapses. If this
3975 value is zero, the recording continues until you stop the
3976 recording.
3977 </para>
3978 </listitem>
3979
3980 <listitem>
3981 <para>
3982 <computeroutput>recordingmaxsize
3983 <replaceable>MB</replaceable></computeroutput> specifies the
3984 maximum size of the recorded video file in megabytes. The
3985 recording stops when the file reaches the specified size. If
3986 this value is zero, the recording continues until you stop the
3987 recording. You cannot modify this setting while recording is
3988 enabled.
3989 </para>
3990 </listitem>
3991
3992 <listitem>
3993 <para>
3994 <computeroutput>recordingopts
3995 <replaceable>keyword</replaceable>=<replaceable>value</replaceable>[,<replaceable>keyword</replaceable>=<replaceable>value</replaceable>
3996 ...]</computeroutput> specifies additional recording options
3997 in a comma-separated keyword-value format. For example,
3998 <computeroutput>foo=bar,a=b</computeroutput>. You cannot
3999 modify this setting while recording is enabled.
4000 </para>
4001
4002 <para>
4003 Only use this option only if you are an advanced user. For
4004 information about keywords, see <emphasis>Oracle VM VirtualBox
4005 Programming Guide and Reference</emphasis>.
4006 </para>
4007 </listitem>
4008
4009 <listitem>
4010 <para>
4011 <computeroutput>setcredentials</computeroutput>: Used for
4012 remote logins on Windows guests. See
4013 <xref linkend="autologon" />.
4014 </para>
4015 </listitem>
4016
4017 <listitem>
4018 <para>
4019 <computeroutput>teleport --host &lt;name&gt; --port
4020 &lt;port&gt;</computeroutput>: Configures a VM as a target for
4021 teleporting. &lt;name&gt; specifies the virtual machine name.
4022 &lt;port&gt; specifies the port on the virtual machine which
4023 should listen for teleporting requests from other virtual
4024 machines. It can be any free TCP/IP port number, such as 6000.
4025 See <xref linkend="teleporting" />.
4026 </para>
4027
4028 <itemizedlist>
4029
4030 <listitem>
4031 <para>
4032 <computeroutput>--maxdowntime
4033 &lt;msec&gt;</computeroutput>: Specifies the maximum
4034 downtime, in milliseconds, for the teleporting target VM.
4035 Optional.
4036 </para>
4037 </listitem>
4038
4039 <listitem>
4040 <para>
4041 <computeroutput>--password
4042 &lt;password&gt;</computeroutput>: The teleporting request
4043 will only succeed if the source machine specifies the same
4044 password as the one given with this command. Optional.
4045 </para>
4046 </listitem>
4047
4048 <listitem>
4049 <para>
4050 <computeroutput>--passwordfile &lt;password
4051 file&gt;</computeroutput>: The teleporting request will
4052 only succeed if the source machine specifies the same
4053 password as the one specified in the password file with
4054 the path specified with this command. Use
4055 <computeroutput>stdin</computeroutput> to read the
4056 password from stdin. Optional.
4057 </para>
4058 </listitem>
4059
4060 </itemizedlist>
4061 </listitem>
4062
4063 <listitem>
4064 <para>
4065 <computeroutput>plugcpu|unplugcpu &lt;id&gt;</computeroutput>:
4066 If CPU hot-plugging is enabled, this setting adds and removes
4067 a virtual CPU to the virtual machine.
4068 <computeroutput>&lt;id&gt;</computeroutput> specifies the
4069 index of the virtual CPU to be added or removed and must be a
4070 number from 0 to the maximum number of CPUs configured. CPU 0
4071 can never be removed.
4072 </para>
4073 </listitem>
4074
4075 <listitem>
4076 <para>
4077 The <computeroutput>cpuexecutioncap
4078 &lt;1-100&gt;</computeroutput>: Controls how much CPU time a
4079 virtual CPU can use. A value of 50 implies a single virtual
4080 CPU can use up to 50% of a single host CPU.
4081 </para>
4082 </listitem>
4083
4084 <listitem>
4085 <para>
4086 <computeroutput>webcam attach &lt;path|alias&gt;
4087 [&lt;keyword=value&gt;[;&lt;keyword=value&gt;...]]</computeroutput>:
4088 Attaches a webcam to a running VM. Specify the absolute path
4089 of the webcam on the host operating system, or use its alias,
4090 obtained by using the command: <command>VBoxManage list
4091 webcams</command>.
4092 </para>
4093
4094 <para>
4095 Note that alias '.0' means the default video input device on
4096 the host operating system, '.1', '.2', etc. mean first,
4097 second, etc. video input device. The device order is
4098 host-specific.
4099 </para>
4100
4101 <para>
4102 The optional settings parameter is a
4103 <computeroutput>;</computeroutput> delimited list of
4104 name-value pairs, enabling configuration of the emulated
4105 webcam device.
4106 </para>
4107
4108 <para>
4109 The following settings are supported:
4110 </para>
4111
4112 <para>
4113 MaxFramerate: Specifies the highest rate in frames per second,
4114 at which video frames are sent to the guest. Higher frame
4115 rates increase CPU load, so this setting can be useful when
4116 there is a need to reduce CPU load. The default setting is
4117 <computeroutput>no maximum limit</computeroutput>, thus
4118 enabling the guest to use all frame rates supported by the
4119 host webcam.
4120 </para>
4121
4122 <para>
4123 MaxPayloadTransferSize: Specifies the maximum number of bytes
4124 the emulated webcam can send to the guest in one buffer. The
4125 default setting is 3060 bytes, which is used by some webcams.
4126 Higher values can slightly reduce CPU load, if the guest is
4127 able to use larger buffers. Note that higher
4128 MaxPayloadTransferSize values may be not supported by some
4129 guest operating systems.
4130 </para>
4131 </listitem>
4132
4133 <listitem>
4134 <para>
4135 <computeroutput>webcam detach
4136 &lt;path|alias&gt;</computeroutput>: Detaches a webcam from a
4137 running VM. Specify the absolute path of the webcam on the
4138 host, or use its alias obtained from the <command>webcam
4139 list</command> command.
4140 </para>
4141
4142 <para>
4143 Please note the following points, relating to specific host
4144 operating systems:
4145 </para>
4146
4147 <itemizedlist>
4148
4149 <listitem>
4150 <para>
4151 Windows hosts: When the webcam device is detached from the
4152 host, the emulated webcam device is automatically detached
4153 from the guest.
4154 </para>
4155 </listitem>
4156
4157 <listitem>
4158 <para>
4159 Mac OS X hosts: OS X version 10.7 or newer is required.
4160 </para>
4161
4162 <para>
4163 When the webcam device is detached from the host, the
4164 emulated webcam device remains attached to the guest and
4165 must be manually detached using the <command>VBoxManage
4166 controlvm webcam detach</command> command.
4167 </para>
4168 </listitem>
4169
4170 <listitem>
4171 <para>
4172 Linux hosts: When the webcam is detached from the host,
4173 the emulated webcam device is automatically detached from
4174 the guest only if the webcam is streaming video. If the
4175 emulated webcam is inactive, it should be manually
4176 detached using the <command>VBoxManage controlvm webcam
4177 detach</command> command.
4178 </para>
4179 </listitem>
4180
4181 </itemizedlist>
4182 </listitem>
4183
4184 <listitem>
4185 <para>
4186 <computeroutput>webcam list</computeroutput>: Lists webcams
4187 attached to the running VM. The output is a list of absolute
4188 paths or aliases that were used for attaching the webcams to
4189 the VM using the <command>webcam attach</command> command.
4190 </para>
4191 </listitem>
4192
4193 <listitem>
4194 <para>
4195 <computeroutput>addencpassword &lt;id&gt; &lt;password
4196 file&gt;|- [--removeonsuspend
4197 &lt;yes|no&gt;]</computeroutput>: Supplies an encrypted VM
4198 specified by &lt;id&gt; with the encryption password to enable
4199 a headless start. Either specify the absolute path of a
4200 password file on the host file system: &lt;password file&gt;,
4201 or use <option>-</option> to instruct
4202 <command>VBoxManage</command> to prompt the user for the
4203 encryption password.
4204 </para>
4205
4206 <para>
4207 <computeroutput>--removeonsuspend
4208 &lt;yes|no&gt;</computeroutput>: Specifies whether to remove
4209 the passsword or keep the password in VM memory when the VM is
4210 suspended. If the VM has been suspended and the password has
4211 been removed, the user needs to resupply the password before
4212 the VM can be resumed. This feature is useful in cases where
4213 the user does not want the password to be stored in VM memory,
4214 and the VM is suspended by a host suspend event.
4215 </para>
4216
4217 <note>
4218 <para>
4219 On &product-name; versions 5.0 and later, data stored on
4220 hard disk images can be transparently encrypted for the
4221 guest. &product-name; uses the AES algorithm in XTS mode and
4222 supports 128 or 256 bit data encryption keys (DEK). The DEK
4223 is stored encrypted in the medium properties, and is
4224 decrypted during VM startup by supplying the encryption
4225 password.
4226 </para>
4227 </note>
4228
4229 <para>
4230 The <command>VBoxManage encryptmedium</command> command is
4231 used to create a DEK encrypted medium. See
4232 <xref linkend="diskencryption-encryption" />. When starting an
4233 encrypted VM from the &product-name; GUI, the user will be
4234 prompted for the encryption password.
4235 </para>
4236
4237 <para>
4238 For a headless encrypted VM start, use the following command:
4239 </para>
4240
4241<screen>
4242 VBoxManage startvm "vmname" --type headless
4243 </screen>
4244
4245 <para>
4246 Then supply the required encryption password as follows:
4247 </para>
4248
4249<screen>
4250 VBoxManage "vmname" controlvm "vmname" addencpassword ...
4251 </screen>
4252
4253 <para></para>
4254 </listitem>
4255
4256 <listitem>
4257 <para>
4258 <computeroutput>removeencpassword &lt;id&gt;</computeroutput>:
4259 Removes encryption password authorization for password
4260 &lt;id&gt; for all encrypted media attached to the VM.
4261 </para>
4262 </listitem>
4263
4264 <listitem>
4265 <para>
4266 <computeroutput>removeallencpasswords</computeroutput>:
4267 Removes encryption password authorization for all passwords
4268 for all encrypted media attached to the VM.
4269 </para>
4270 </listitem>
4271
4272 <listitem>
4273 <para>
4274 <computeroutput>changeuartmode &lt;1-N&gt;</computeroutput>:
4275 Changes the connection mode for a given virtual serial port.
4276 </para>
4277 </listitem>
4278
4279 </itemizedlist>
4280
4281 </sect1>
4282
4283 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-discardstate">
4284
4285 <title>VBoxManage discardstate</title>
4286
4287 <para>
4288 This command discards the saved state of a virtual machine which
4289 is not currently running. This will cause the VM's operating
4290 system to restart next time you start it. This is the equivalent
4291 of pulling out the power cable on a physical machine, and should
4292 be avoided if possible.
4293 </para>
4294
4295 </sect1>
4296
4297 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-adoptstate">
4298
4299 <title>VBoxManage adoptstate</title>
4300
4301 <para>
4302 If you have a Saved state file
4303 (<computeroutput>.sav</computeroutput>) that is separate from the
4304 VM configuration, you can use this command to
4305 <emphasis>adopt</emphasis> the file. This will change the VM to
4306 saved state and when you start it, &product-name; will attempt to
4307 restore it from the saved state file you indicated. This command
4308 should only be used in special setups.
4309 </para>
4310
4311 </sect1>
4312
4313 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-closemedium">
4314
4315 <title>VBoxManage closemedium</title>
4316
4317 <para>
4318 This command removes a hard disk, DVD, or floppy image from a
4319 &product-name; media registry.
4320 </para>
4321
4322<screen>VBoxManage closemedium [disk|dvd|floppy] &lt;uuid|filename&gt;
4323 [--delete]</screen>
4324
4325 <para>
4326 Optionally, you can request that the image be deleted. You will
4327 get appropriate diagnostics that the deletion failed, however the
4328 image will become unregistered in any case.
4329 </para>
4330
4331 </sect1>
4332
4333 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-storageattach">
4334
4335 <title>VBoxManage storageattach</title>
4336
4337 <para>
4338 This command attaches, modifies, and removes a storage medium
4339 connected to a storage controller that was previously added with
4340 the <command>storagectl</command> command. The syntax is as
4341 follows:
4342 </para>
4343
4344<screen>VBoxManage storageattach &lt;uuid|vmname&gt;
4345 --storagectl &lt;name&gt;
4346 [--port &lt;number&gt;]
4347 [--device &lt;number&gt;]
4348 [--type dvddrive|hdd|fdd]
4349 [--medium none|emptydrive|additions|
4350 &lt;uuid&gt;|&lt;filename&gt;|host:&lt;drive&gt;|iscsi]
4351 [--mtype normal|writethrough|immutable|shareable
4352 readonly|multiattach]
4353 [--comment &lt;text&gt;]
4354 [--setuuid &lt;uuid&gt;]
4355 [--setparentuuid &lt;uuid&gt;]
4356 [--passthrough on|off]
4357 [--tempeject on|off]
4358 [--nonrotational on|off]
4359 [--discard on|off]
4360 [--hotpluggable on|off]
4361 [--bandwidthgroup name|none]
4362 [--forceunmount]
4363 [--server &lt;name&gt;|&lt;ip&gt;]
4364 [--target &lt;target&gt;]
4365 [--tport &lt;port&gt;]
4366 [--lun &lt;lun&gt;]
4367 [--encodedlun &lt;lun&gt;]
4368 [--username &lt;username&gt;]
4369 [--password &lt;password&gt;]
4370 [--passwordfile &lt;file&gt;]
4371 [--initiator &lt;initiator&gt;]
4372 [--intnet]</screen>
4373
4374 <para>
4375 A number of parameters are commonly required. Some parameters are
4376 required only for iSCSI targets.
4377 </para>
4378
4379 <para>
4380 The common parameters are as follows:
4381 </para>
4382
4383 <variablelist>
4384
4385 <varlistentry>
4386 <term>
4387 <computeroutput>uuid|vmname</computeroutput>
4388 </term>
4389
4390 <listitem>
4391 <para>
4392 The VM UUID or VM Name. Mandatory.
4393 </para>
4394 </listitem>
4395 </varlistentry>
4396
4397 <varlistentry>
4398 <term>
4399 <computeroutput>--storagectl</computeroutput>
4400 </term>
4401
4402 <listitem>
4403 <para>
4404 Name of the storage controller. Mandatory. The list of the
4405 storage controllers currently attached to a VM can be
4406 obtained with <command>VBoxManage showvminfo</command>. See
4407 <xref linkend="vboxmanage-showvminfo" />.
4408 </para>
4409 </listitem>
4410 </varlistentry>
4411
4412 <varlistentry>
4413 <term>
4414 <computeroutput>--port</computeroutput>
4415 </term>
4416
4417 <listitem>
4418 <para>
4419 The number of the storage controller's port which is to be
4420 modified. Mandatory, unless the storage controller has only
4421 a single port.
4422 </para>
4423 </listitem>
4424 </varlistentry>
4425
4426 <varlistentry>
4427 <term>
4428 <computeroutput>--device</computeroutput>
4429 </term>
4430
4431 <listitem>
4432 <para>
4433 The number of the port's device which is to be modified.
4434 Mandatory, unless the storage controller has only a single
4435 device per port.
4436 </para>
4437 </listitem>
4438 </varlistentry>
4439
4440 <varlistentry>
4441 <term>
4442 <computeroutput>--type</computeroutput>
4443 </term>
4444
4445 <listitem>
4446 <para>
4447 Define the type of the drive to which the medium is being
4448 attached, detached, or modified. This argument can only be
4449 omitted if the type of medium can be determined from either
4450 the medium given with the
4451 <computeroutput>--medium</computeroutput> argument or from a
4452 previous medium attachment.
4453 </para>
4454 </listitem>
4455 </varlistentry>
4456
4457 <varlistentry>
4458 <term>
4459 <computeroutput>--medium</computeroutput>
4460 </term>
4461
4462 <listitem>
4463 <para>
4464 Specifies what is to be attached. The following values are
4465 supported:
4466 </para>
4467
4468 <itemizedlist>
4469
4470 <listitem>
4471 <para>
4472 <computeroutput>none</computeroutput>: Any existing
4473 device should be removed from the given slot.
4474 </para>
4475 </listitem>
4476
4477 <listitem>
4478 <para>
4479 <computeroutput>emptydrive</computeroutput>: For a
4480 virtual DVD or floppy drive only, this makes the device
4481 slot behave like a removeable drive into which no media
4482 has been inserted.
4483 </para>
4484 </listitem>
4485
4486 <listitem>
4487 <para>
4488 <computeroutput>additions</computeroutput>: For a
4489 virtual DVD drive only, this attaches the
4490 <emphasis>VirtualBox Guest Additions</emphasis> image to
4491 the given device slot.
4492 </para>
4493 </listitem>
4494
4495 <listitem>
4496 <para>
4497 If a UUID is specified, it must be the UUID of a storage
4498 medium that is already known to &product-name;. For
4499 example, because it has been attached to another virtual
4500 machine. See <xref linkend="vboxmanage-list" /> for
4501 details of how to list known media. This medium is then
4502 attached to the given device slot.
4503 </para>
4504 </listitem>
4505
4506 <listitem>
4507 <para>
4508 If a filename is specified, it must be the full path of
4509 an existing disk image in ISO, RAW, VDI, VMDK, or other
4510 format. The disk image is then attached to the given
4511 device slot.
4512 </para>
4513 </listitem>
4514
4515 <listitem>
4516 <para>
4517 <computeroutput>host:&lt;drive&gt;</computeroutput>: For
4518 a virtual DVD or floppy drive only, this connects the
4519 given device slot to the specified DVD or floppy drive
4520 on the host computer.
4521 </para>
4522 </listitem>
4523
4524 <listitem>
4525 <para>
4526 <computeroutput>iscsi</computeroutput>: For virtual hard
4527 disks only, this is used for specifying an iSCSI target.
4528 In this case, additional parameters must be given. These
4529 are described below.
4530 </para>
4531 </listitem>
4532
4533 </itemizedlist>
4534
4535 <para>
4536 Some of the above changes, in particular for removeable
4537 media such as floppies and CDs/DVDs, can be effected while a
4538 VM is running. Others, such as device changes or changes in
4539 hard disk device slots, require the VM to be powered off.
4540 </para>
4541 </listitem>
4542 </varlistentry>
4543
4544 <varlistentry>
4545 <term>
4546 <computeroutput>--mtype</computeroutput>
4547 </term>
4548
4549 <listitem>
4550 <para>
4551 Defines how this medium behaves with respect to snapshots
4552 and write operations. See <xref linkend="hdimagewrites" />.
4553 </para>
4554 </listitem>
4555 </varlistentry>
4556
4557 <varlistentry>
4558 <term>
4559 <computeroutput>--comment</computeroutput>
4560 </term>
4561
4562 <listitem>
4563 <para>
4564 An optional description that you want to have stored with
4565 this medium. For example, for an iSCSI target, "Big storage
4566 server downstairs". This is purely descriptive and not
4567 needed for the medium to function correctly.
4568 </para>
4569 </listitem>
4570 </varlistentry>
4571
4572 <varlistentry>
4573 <term>
4574 <computeroutput>--setuuid, --setparentuuid</computeroutput>
4575 </term>
4576
4577 <listitem>
4578 <para>
4579 Modifies the UUID or parent UUID of a medium before
4580 attaching it to a VM. This is an expert option.
4581 Inappropriate use can make the medium unusable or lead to
4582 broken VM configurations if any other VM is referring to the
4583 same media already. The most frequently used variant is
4584 <computeroutput>--setuuid ""</computeroutput>, which assigns
4585 a new random UUID to an image. This option is useful for
4586 resolving duplicate UUID errors if you duplicated an image
4587 using a file copy utility.
4588 </para>
4589 </listitem>
4590 </varlistentry>
4591
4592 <varlistentry>
4593 <term>
4594 <computeroutput>--passthrough</computeroutput>
4595 </term>
4596
4597 <listitem>
4598 <para>
4599 For a virtual DVD drive only, you can enable DVD writing
4600 support. This feature is currently experimental, see
4601 <xref
4602 linkend="storage-cds" />.
4603 </para>
4604 </listitem>
4605 </varlistentry>
4606
4607 <varlistentry>
4608 <term>
4609 <computeroutput>--tempeject</computeroutput>
4610 </term>
4611
4612 <listitem>
4613 <para>
4614 For a virtual DVD drive only, you can configure the behavior
4615 for guest-triggered medium eject. If this is set to on, the
4616 eject has only a temporary effect. If the VM is powered off
4617 and restarted the originally configured medium will be still
4618 in the drive.
4619 </para>
4620 </listitem>
4621 </varlistentry>
4622
4623 <varlistentry>
4624 <term>
4625 <computeroutput>--nonrotational</computeroutput>
4626 </term>
4627
4628 <listitem>
4629 <para>
4630 Enables you to enable the non-rotational flag for virtual
4631 hard disks. Some guests, such as Windows 7 or later, treat
4632 such disks like SSDs and do not perform disk fragmentation
4633 on such media.
4634 </para>
4635 </listitem>
4636 </varlistentry>
4637
4638 <varlistentry>
4639 <term>
4640 <computeroutput>--discard</computeroutput>
4641 </term>
4642
4643 <listitem>
4644 <para>
4645 Enables the auto-discard feature for a virtual hard disks.
4646 This specifies that a VDI image will be shrunk in response
4647 to the trim command from the guest OS. The following
4648 requirements must be met:
4649 </para>
4650
4651 <itemizedlist>
4652
4653 <listitem>
4654 <para>
4655 The disk format must be VDI.
4656 </para>
4657 </listitem>
4658
4659 <listitem>
4660 <para>
4661 The size of the cleared area must be at least 1 MB.
4662 </para>
4663 </listitem>
4664
4665 <listitem>
4666 <para>
4667 &product-name; will only trim whole 1 MB blocks. The
4668 VDIs themselves are organized into 1 MB blocks, so this
4669 will only work if the space being trimmed is at least a
4670 1 MB contiguous block at a 1 MB boundary. On Windows,
4671 occasional defragmentation with <command>defrag.exe
4672 /D</command>, or on Linux running <command>btrfs
4673 filesystem defrag</command> as a background cron job may
4674 be beneficial.
4675 </para>
4676 </listitem>
4677
4678 </itemizedlist>
4679
4680 <note>
4681 <para>
4682 The Guest OS must be configured to issue the
4683 <command>trim</command> command, and typically this means
4684 that the guest OS is made to see the disk as an SSD. Ext4
4685 supports the -o discard mount flag. Mac OS X probably
4686 requires additional settings. Windows should automatically
4687 detect and support SSDs, at least in versions 7, 8, and
4688 10. The Linux exFAT driver from Samsung supports the
4689 <command>trim</command> command.
4690 </para>
4691 </note>
4692
4693 <para>
4694 It is unclear whether Microsoft's implementation of exFAT
4695 supports this feature, even though that file system was
4696 originally designed for flash.
4697 </para>
4698
4699 <para>
4700 Alternatively, there are other methods to issue trim. For
4701 example, the Linux <command>fstrim</command> command, part
4702 of the util-linux package. Earlier solutions required a user
4703 to zero out unused areas, using zerofree or similar, and to
4704 compact the disk. This is only possible when the VM is
4705 offline.
4706 </para>
4707 </listitem>
4708 </varlistentry>
4709
4710 <varlistentry>
4711 <term>
4712 <computeroutput>--bandwidthgroup</computeroutput>
4713 </term>
4714
4715 <listitem>
4716 <para>
4717 Sets the bandwidth group to use for the given device. See
4718 <xref linkend="storage-bandwidth-limit" />.
4719 </para>
4720 </listitem>
4721 </varlistentry>
4722
4723 <varlistentry>
4724 <term>
4725 <computeroutput>--forceunmount</computeroutput>
4726 </term>
4727
4728 <listitem>
4729 <para>
4730 For a virtual DVD or floppy drive only, this forcibly
4731 unmounts the DVD/CD/Floppy or mounts a new DVD/CD/Floppy
4732 even if the previous one is locked down by the guest for
4733 reading. See <xref linkend="storage-cds" />.
4734 </para>
4735 </listitem>
4736 </varlistentry>
4737
4738 </variablelist>
4739
4740 <para>
4741 When <computeroutput>iscsi</computeroutput> is used with the
4742 <computeroutput>--medium</computeroutput> parameter for iSCSI
4743 support, additional parameters must or can be used. See also
4744 <xref linkend="storage-iscsi" />.
4745 </para>
4746
4747 <variablelist>
4748
4749 <varlistentry>
4750 <term>
4751 <computeroutput>--server</computeroutput>
4752 </term>
4753
4754 <listitem>
4755 <para>
4756 The host name or IP address of the iSCSI target. Required.
4757 </para>
4758 </listitem>
4759 </varlistentry>
4760
4761 <varlistentry>
4762 <term>
4763 <computeroutput>--target</computeroutput>
4764 </term>
4765
4766 <listitem>
4767 <para>
4768 Target name string. This is determined by the iSCSI target
4769 and used to identify the storage resource. Required.
4770 </para>
4771 </listitem>
4772 </varlistentry>
4773
4774 <varlistentry>
4775 <term>
4776 <computeroutput>--tport</computeroutput>
4777 </term>
4778
4779 <listitem>
4780 <para>
4781 TCP/IP port number of the iSCSI service on the target.
4782 Optional.
4783 </para>
4784 </listitem>
4785 </varlistentry>
4786
4787 <varlistentry>
4788 <term>
4789 <computeroutput>--lun</computeroutput>
4790 </term>
4791
4792 <listitem>
4793 <para>
4794 Logical Unit Number of the target resource. Optional. Often,
4795 this value is zero.
4796 </para>
4797 </listitem>
4798 </varlistentry>
4799
4800 <varlistentry>
4801 <term>
4802 <computeroutput>--encodedlun</computeroutput>
4803 </term>
4804
4805 <listitem>
4806 <para>
4807 Hex-encoded Logical Unit Number of the target resource.
4808 Optional. Often, this value is zero.
4809 </para>
4810 </listitem>
4811 </varlistentry>
4812
4813 <varlistentry>
4814 <term>
4815 <computeroutput>--username, --password,
4816 --passwordfile</computeroutput>
4817 </term>
4818
4819 <listitem>
4820 <para>
4821 Username and password, called the initiator secret, for
4822 target authentication, if required. Optional.
4823 </para>
4824
4825 <note>
4826 <para>
4827 Username and password are stored without encryption, in
4828 clear text, in the XML machine configuration file if no
4829 settings password is provided. When a settings password is
4830 specified for the first time, the password is stored in
4831 encrypted form. As an alternative to providing the
4832 password on the command line, a reference to a file
4833 containing the text can be provided using the
4834 <computeroutput>passwordfile</computeroutput> option.
4835 </para>
4836 </note>
4837 </listitem>
4838 </varlistentry>
4839
4840 <varlistentry>
4841 <term>
4842 <computeroutput>--initiator</computeroutput>
4843 </term>
4844
4845 <listitem>
4846 <para>
4847 iSCSI Initiator. Optional.
4848 </para>
4849
4850 <para>
4851 Microsoft iSCSI Initiator is a system, such as a server that
4852 attaches to an IP network and initiates requests and
4853 receives responses from an iSCSI target. The SAN components
4854 in Microsoft iSCSI Initiator are largely analogous to Fibre
4855 Channel SAN components, and they include the following:
4856 </para>
4857
4858 <itemizedlist>
4859
4860 <listitem>
4861 <para>
4862 To transport blocks of iSCSI commands over the IP
4863 network, an iSCSI driver must be installed on the iSCSI
4864 host. An iSCSI driver is included with Microsoft iSCSI
4865 Initiator.
4866 </para>
4867 </listitem>
4868
4869 <listitem>
4870 <para>
4871 A gigabit Ethernet adapter that transmits 1000 megabits
4872 per second (Mbps) is recommended for the connection to
4873 an iSCSI target. Like standard 10/100 adapters, most
4874 gigabit adapters use a preexisting Category 5 or
4875 Category 6E cable. Each port on the adapter is
4876 identified by a unique IP address.
4877 </para>
4878 </listitem>
4879
4880 <listitem>
4881 <para>
4882 An iSCSI target is any device that receives iSCSI
4883 commands. The device can be an end node, such as a
4884 storage device, or it can be an intermediate device,
4885 such as a network bridge between IP and Fibre Channel
4886 devices. Each port on the storage array controller or
4887 network bridge is identified by one or more IP addresses
4888 </para>
4889 </listitem>
4890
4891 </itemizedlist>
4892 </listitem>
4893 </varlistentry>
4894
4895 <varlistentry>
4896 <term>
4897 <computeroutput>--intnet</computeroutput>
4898 </term>
4899
4900 <listitem>
4901 <para>
4902 If specified, connect to the iSCSI target using Internal
4903 Networking. This needs further configuration, see
4904 <xref linkend="iscsi-intnet" />.
4905 </para>
4906 </listitem>
4907 </varlistentry>
4908
4909 </variablelist>
4910
4911 </sect1>
4912
4913 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-storagectl">
4914
4915 <title>VBoxManage storagectl</title>
4916
4917 <para>
4918 This command attaches, modifies, and removes a storage controller.
4919 After this, virtual media can be attached to the controller with
4920 the <command>storageattach</command> command.
4921 </para>
4922
4923 <para>
4924 The syntax for this command is as follows:
4925 </para>
4926
4927<screen>VBoxManage storagectl &lt;uuid|vmname&gt;
4928 --name &lt;name&gt;
4929 [--add ide|sata|scsi|floppy|sas|usb|pcie]
4930 [--controller LSILogic|LSILogicSAS|BusLogic|
4931 IntelAhci|PIIX3|PIIX4|ICH6|I82078|
4932 USB|NVMe]
4933 [--portcount &lt;1-30&gt;]
4934 [--hostiocache on|off]
4935 [--bootable on|off]
4936 [--rename &lt;name&gt;]
4937 [--remove]</screen>
4938
4939 <para>
4940 The parameters are as follows:
4941 </para>
4942
4943 <variablelist>
4944
4945 <varlistentry>
4946 <term>
4947 <computeroutput>uuid|vmname</computeroutput>
4948 </term>
4949
4950 <listitem>
4951 <para>
4952 The VM UUID or VM Name. Mandatory.
4953 </para>
4954 </listitem>
4955 </varlistentry>
4956
4957 <varlistentry>
4958 <term>
4959 <computeroutput>--name</computeroutput>
4960 </term>
4961
4962 <listitem>
4963 <para>
4964 Specifies the name of the storage controller. Mandatory.
4965 </para>
4966 </listitem>
4967 </varlistentry>
4968
4969 <varlistentry>
4970 <term>
4971 <computeroutput>--add</computeroutput>
4972 </term>
4973
4974 <listitem>
4975 <para>
4976 Specifies the type of the system bus to which the storage
4977 controller must be connected.
4978 </para>
4979 </listitem>
4980 </varlistentry>
4981
4982 <varlistentry>
4983 <term>
4984 <computeroutput>--controller</computeroutput>
4985 </term>
4986
4987 <listitem>
4988 <para>
4989 Enables a choice of chipset type being emulated for the
4990 given storage controller.
4991 </para>
4992 </listitem>
4993 </varlistentry>
4994
4995 <varlistentry>
4996 <term>
4997 <computeroutput>--portcount</computeroutput>
4998 </term>
4999
5000 <listitem>
5001 <para>
5002 This specifies the number of ports the storage controller
5003 should support.
5004 </para>
5005 </listitem>
5006 </varlistentry>
5007
5008 <varlistentry>
5009 <term>
5010 <computeroutput>--hostiocache</computeroutput>
5011 </term>
5012
5013 <listitem>
5014 <para>
5015 Configures the use of the host I/O cache for all disk images
5016 attached to this storage controller. See
5017 <xref
5018 linkend="iocaching" />.
5019 </para>
5020 </listitem>
5021 </varlistentry>
5022
5023 <varlistentry>
5024 <term>
5025 <computeroutput>--bootable</computeroutput>
5026 </term>
5027
5028 <listitem>
5029 <para>
5030 Specifies whether this controller is bootable.
5031 </para>
5032 </listitem>
5033 </varlistentry>
5034
5035 <varlistentry>
5036 <term>
5037 <computeroutput>--rename</computeroutput>
5038 </term>
5039
5040 <listitem>
5041 <para>
5042 Specifies a new name for the storage controller.
5043 </para>
5044 </listitem>
5045 </varlistentry>
5046
5047 <varlistentry>
5048 <term>
5049 <computeroutput>--remove</computeroutput>
5050 </term>
5051
5052 <listitem>
5053 <para>
5054 Removes the storage controller from the VM configuration.
5055 </para>
5056 </listitem>
5057 </varlistentry>
5058
5059 </variablelist>
5060
5061 </sect1>
5062
5063 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-bandwidthctl">
5064
5065 <title>VBoxManage bandwidthctl</title>
5066
5067 <para>
5068 This command creates, deletes, modifies, and shows bandwidth
5069 groups of the given virtual machine.
5070 </para>
5071
5072<screen>VBoxManage bandwidthctl &lt;uuid|vmname&gt;
5073 add &lt;name&gt; --type disk|network --limit &lt;MBps&gt;[k|m|g|K|M|G] |
5074 set &lt;name&gt; --limit &lt;MBps&gt;[k|m|g|K|M|G] |
5075 remove &lt;name&gt; |
5076 list [--machinereadable]</screen>
5077
5078 <para>
5079 The following subcommands are available:
5080 </para>
5081
5082 <itemizedlist>
5083
5084 <listitem>
5085 <para>
5086 <command>add</command>: Creates a new bandwidth group of a
5087 given type.
5088 </para>
5089 </listitem>
5090
5091 <listitem>
5092 <para>
5093 <command>set</command>: Modifies the limit for an existing
5094 bandwidth group.
5095 </para>
5096 </listitem>
5097
5098 <listitem>
5099 <para>
5100 <command>remove</command>: Deletes a bandwidth group.
5101 </para>
5102 </listitem>
5103
5104 <listitem>
5105 <para>
5106 <command>list</command>: Shows all bandwidth groups defined
5107 for the given VM. Use the
5108 <computeroutput>--machinereadable</computeroutput> option to
5109 produce the same output, but in machine readable format. This
5110 is of the form: name="value" on a line by line basis.
5111 </para>
5112 </listitem>
5113
5114 </itemizedlist>
5115
5116 <para>
5117 The parameters are as follows:
5118 </para>
5119
5120 <variablelist>
5121
5122 <varlistentry>
5123 <term>
5124 <computeroutput>uuid|vmname</computeroutput>
5125 </term>
5126
5127 <listitem>
5128 <para>
5129 The VM UUID or VM Name. Mandatory.
5130 </para>
5131 </listitem>
5132 </varlistentry>
5133
5134 <varlistentry>
5135 <term>
5136 <computeroutput>--name</computeroutput>
5137 </term>
5138
5139 <listitem>
5140 <para>
5141 Name of the bandwidth group. Mandatory.
5142 </para>
5143 </listitem>
5144 </varlistentry>
5145
5146 <varlistentry>
5147 <term>
5148 <computeroutput>--type</computeroutput>
5149 </term>
5150
5151 <listitem>
5152 <para>
5153 Type of the bandwidth group. Mandatory. Two types are
5154 supported: <computeroutput>disk</computeroutput> and
5155 <computeroutput>network</computeroutput>. See
5156 <xref linkend="storage-bandwidth-limit" /> or
5157 <xref linkend="network_bandwidth_limit" /> for the
5158 description of a particular type.
5159 </para>
5160 </listitem>
5161 </varlistentry>
5162
5163 <varlistentry>
5164 <term>
5165 <computeroutput>--limit</computeroutput>
5166 </term>
5167
5168 <listitem>
5169 <para>
5170 Specifies the limit for the given bandwidth group. This can
5171 be changed while the VM is running. The default unit is
5172 megabytes per second. The unit can be changed by specifying
5173 one of the following suffixes:
5174 <computeroutput>k</computeroutput> for kilobits per second,
5175 <computeroutput>m</computeroutput> for megabits per second,
5176 <computeroutput>g</computeroutput> for gigabits per second,
5177 <computeroutput>K</computeroutput> for kilobytes per second,
5178 <computeroutput>M</computeroutput> for megabytes per second,
5179 <computeroutput>G</computeroutput> for gigabytes per second.
5180 </para>
5181 </listitem>
5182 </varlistentry>
5183
5184 </variablelist>
5185
5186 <note>
5187 <para>
5188 The network bandwidth limits apply only to the traffic being
5189 sent by virtual machines. The traffic being received by VMs is
5190 unlimited.
5191 </para>
5192 </note>
5193
5194 <note>
5195 <para>
5196 To remove a bandwidth group it must not be referenced by any
5197 disks or adapters in the running VM.
5198 </para>
5199 </note>
5200
5201 </sect1>
5202
5203 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-showmediuminfo">
5204
5205 <title>VBoxManage showmediuminfo</title>
5206
5207 <para>
5208 This command shows information about a medium, notably its size,
5209 its size on disk, its type, and the virtual machines which use it.
5210 </para>
5211
5212 <note>
5213 <para>
5214 For compatibility with earlier versions of &product-name;, the
5215 <command>showvdiinfo</command> command is also supported and
5216 mapped internally to the <command>showmediuminfo</command>
5217 command.
5218 </para>
5219 </note>
5220
5221<screen>VBoxManage showmediuminfo [disk|dvd|floppy] &lt;uuid|filename&gt;</screen>
5222
5223 <para>
5224 The medium must be specified either by its UUID, if the medium is
5225 registered, or by its filename. Registered images can be listed
5226 using <command>VBoxManage list hdds</command>, <command>VBoxManage
5227 list dvds</command>, or <command>VBoxManage list
5228 floppies</command>, as appropriate. See
5229 <xref linkend="vboxmanage-list" />.
5230 </para>
5231
5232 </sect1>
5233
5234 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-createmedium">
5235
5236 <title>VBoxManage createmedium</title>
5237
5238 <para>
5239 This command creates a new medium. The syntax is as follows:
5240 </para>
5241
5242<screen>VBoxManage createmedium [disk|dvd|floppy] --filename &lt;filename&gt;
5243 [--size &lt;megabytes&gt;|--sizebyte &lt;bytes&gt;]
5244 [--diffparent &lt;uuid&gt;|&lt;filename&gt;
5245 [--format VDI|VMDK|VHD] (default: VDI)
5246 [--variant Standard,Fixed,Split2G,Stream,ESX]</screen>
5247
5248 <para>
5249 The parameters are as follows:
5250 </para>
5251
5252 <variablelist>
5253
5254 <varlistentry>
5255 <term>
5256 <computeroutput>--filename &lt;filename&gt;</computeroutput>
5257 </term>
5258
5259 <listitem>
5260 <para>
5261 Specifies a file name &lt;filename&gt; as an absolute path
5262 on the host file system. Mandatory.
5263 </para>
5264 </listitem>
5265 </varlistentry>
5266
5267 <varlistentry>
5268 <term>
5269 <computeroutput>--size &lt;megabytes&gt;</computeroutput>
5270 </term>
5271
5272 <listitem>
5273 <para>
5274 Specifies the image capacity, in 1 MB units. Optional.
5275 </para>
5276 </listitem>
5277 </varlistentry>
5278
5279 <varlistentry>
5280 <term>
5281 <computeroutput>--diffparent
5282 &lt;uuid&gt;|&lt;filename&gt;</computeroutput>
5283 </term>
5284
5285 <listitem>
5286 <para>
5287 Specifies the differencing image parent, either as a UUID or
5288 by the absolute pathname of the file on the host file
5289 system. Useful for sharing a base box disk image among
5290 several VMs.
5291 </para>
5292 </listitem>
5293 </varlistentry>
5294
5295 <varlistentry>
5296 <term>
5297 <computeroutput>--format VDI|VMDK|VHD</computeroutput>
5298 </term>
5299
5300 <listitem>
5301 <para>
5302 Specifies the file format for the output file. Available
5303 options are VDI, VMDK, VHD. The default format is VDI.
5304 Optional.
5305 </para>
5306 </listitem>
5307 </varlistentry>
5308
5309 <varlistentry>
5310 <term>
5311 <computeroutput>--variant</computeroutput>
5312 </term>
5313
5314 <listitem>
5315 <para>
5316 Specifies any required file format variants for the output
5317 file. This is a comma-separated list of variant flags.
5318 Options are Standard,Fixed,Split2G,Stream,ESX. Not all
5319 combinations are supported, and specifying mutually
5320 incompatible flags results in an error message. Optional.
5321 </para>
5322 </listitem>
5323 </varlistentry>
5324
5325 </variablelist>
5326
5327 <note>
5328 <para>
5329 For compatibility with earlier versions of &product-name;, the
5330 <command>createvdi</command> and <command>createhd</command>
5331 commands are also supported and mapped internally to the
5332 <command>createmedium</command> command.
5333 </para>
5334 </note>
5335
5336 </sect1>
5337
5338 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-modifyvdi">
5339
5340 <title>VBoxManage modifymedium</title>
5341
5342 <para>
5343 With the <command>modifymedium</command> command, you can change
5344 the characteristics of a disk image after it has been created.
5345 </para>
5346
5347<screen>VBoxManage modifymedium [disk|dvd|floppy] &lt;uuid|filename&gt;
5348 [--type normal|writethrough|immutable|shareable|
5349 readonly|multiattach]
5350 [--autoreset on|off]
5351 [--property &lt;name=[value]&gt;]
5352 [--compact]
5353 [--resize &lt;megabytes&gt;|--resizebyte &lt;bytes&gt;]
5354 [--move &lt;path&gt;]
5355 [--setlocation &lt;path&gt;]</screen>
5356
5357 <note>
5358 <para>
5359 For compatibility with earlier versions of &product-name;, the
5360 <command>modifyvdi</command> and <command>modifyhd</command>
5361 commands are also supported and mapped internally to the
5362 <command>modifymedium</command> command.
5363 </para>
5364 </note>
5365
5366 <para>
5367 The disk image to modify must be specified either by its UUID, if
5368 the medium is registered, or by its filename. Registered images
5369 can be listed using <command>VBoxManage list hdds</command>, see
5370 <xref linkend="vboxmanage-list" />. A filename must be specified
5371 as a valid path, either as an absolute path or as a relative path
5372 starting from the current directory.
5373 </para>
5374
5375 <para>
5376 The following options are available:
5377 </para>
5378
5379 <itemizedlist>
5380
5381 <listitem>
5382 <para>
5383 With the <computeroutput>--type</computeroutput> argument, you
5384 can change the type of an existing image between the normal,
5385 immutable, write-through and other modes. See
5386 <xref
5387 linkend="hdimagewrites" />.
5388 </para>
5389 </listitem>
5390
5391 <listitem>
5392 <para>
5393 For immutable hard disks only, the <computeroutput>--autoreset
5394 on|off</computeroutput> option determines whether the disk is
5395 automatically reset on every VM startup. See
5396 <xref linkend="hdimagewrites" />. By default, autoreset is on.
5397 </para>
5398 </listitem>
5399
5400 <listitem>
5401 <para>
5402 The <computeroutput>--compact</computeroutput> option can be
5403 used to compact disk images. Compacting removes blocks that
5404 only contains zeroes. Using this option will shrink a
5405 dynamically allocated image. It will reduce the
5406 <emphasis>physical</emphasis> size of the image without
5407 affecting the logical size of the virtual disk. Compaction
5408 works both for base images and for differencing images created
5409 as part of a snapshot.
5410 </para>
5411
5412 <para>
5413 For this operation to be effective, it is required that free
5414 space in the guest system first be zeroed out using a suitable
5415 software tool. For Windows guests, you can use the
5416 <command>sdelete</command> tool provided by Microsoft. Run
5417 <command>sdelete -z</command> in the guest to zero the free
5418 disk space, before compressing the virtual disk image. For
5419 Linux, use the <command>zerofree</command> utility which
5420 supports ext2/ext3 filesystems. For Mac OS X guests, use the
5421 <computeroutput>diskutil secureErase freespace 0
5422 /</computeroutput> command from an elevated Terminal.
5423 </para>
5424
5425 <para>
5426 Please note that compacting is currently only available for
5427 VDI images. A similar effect can be achieved by zeroing out
5428 free blocks and then cloning the disk to any other dynamically
5429 allocated format. You can use this workaround until compacting
5430 is also supported for disk formats other than VDI.
5431 </para>
5432 </listitem>
5433
5434 <listitem>
5435 <para>
5436 The <computeroutput>--resize x</computeroutput> option, where
5437 x is the desired new total space in megabytes enables you to
5438 change the capacity of an existing image. This adjusts the
5439 <emphasis>logical</emphasis> size of a virtual disk without
5440 affecting the physical size much.
5441 </para>
5442
5443 <para>
5444 This option currently works only for VDI and VHD formats, and
5445 only for the dynamically allocated variants. It can only be
5446 used to expand, but not shrink, the capacity. For example, if
5447 you originally created a 10 GB disk which is now full, you can
5448 use the <computeroutput>--resize 15360</computeroutput>
5449 command to change the capacity to 15 GB (15,360 MB) without
5450 having to create a new image and copy all data from within a
5451 virtual machine. Note however that this only changes the drive
5452 capacity. You will typically next need to use a partition
5453 management tool inside the guest to adjust the main partition
5454 to fill the drive.
5455 </para>
5456
5457 <para>
5458 The <computeroutput>--resizebyte x</computeroutput> option
5459 does almost the same thing, except that x is expressed in
5460 bytes instead of megabytes.
5461 </para>
5462 </listitem>
5463
5464 <listitem>
5465 <para>
5466 The <computeroutput>--move &lt;path&gt;</computeroutput>
5467 option can be used to relocate a medium to a different
5468 location &lt;path&gt; on the host file system. The path can be
5469 either relative to the current directory or absolute.
5470 </para>
5471 </listitem>
5472
5473 <listitem>
5474 <para>
5475 The <computeroutput>--setlocation
5476 &lt;path&gt;</computeroutput> option can be used to set the
5477 new location &lt;path&gt; of the medium on the host file
5478 system if the medium has been moved for any reasons. The path
5479 can be either relative to the current directory or absolute.
5480 </para>
5481
5482 <note>
5483 <para>
5484 The new location is used as is, without any sanity checks.
5485 The user is responsible for setting the correct path.
5486 </para>
5487 </note>
5488 </listitem>
5489
5490 </itemizedlist>
5491
5492 </sect1>
5493
5494 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-clonevdi">
5495
5496 <title>VBoxManage clonemedium</title>
5497
5498 <para>
5499 This command duplicates a virtual disk, DVD, or floppy medium to a
5500 new medium, usually an image file, with a new unique identifier
5501 (UUID). The new image can be transferred to another host system or
5502 reimported into &product-name; using the Virtual Media Manager.
5503 See <xref linkend="vdis" /> and <xref linkend="cloningvdis" />.
5504 The syntax is as follows:
5505 </para>
5506
5507<screen>VBoxManage clonemedium [disk|dvd|floppy] &lt;uuid|inputfile&gt; &lt;uuid|outputfile&gt;
5508
5509 [--format VDI|VMDK|VHD|RAW|&lt;other&gt;]
5510 [--variant Standard,Fixed,Split2G,Stream,ESX]
5511 [--existing]</screen>
5512
5513 <para>
5514 The medium to clone as well as the target image must be described
5515 either by its UUIDs, if the mediums are registered, or by its
5516 filename. Registered images can be listed by <command>VBoxManage
5517 list hdds</command>. See <xref linkend="vboxmanage-list" />. A
5518 filename must be specified as valid path, either as an absolute
5519 path or as a relative path starting from the current directory.
5520 </para>
5521
5522 <para>
5523 The following options are available:
5524 </para>
5525
5526 <variablelist>
5527
5528 <varlistentry>
5529 <term>
5530 <computeroutput>--format</computeroutput>
5531 </term>
5532
5533 <listitem>
5534 <para>
5535 Set a file format for the output file different from the
5536 file format of the input file.
5537 </para>
5538 </listitem>
5539 </varlistentry>
5540
5541 <varlistentry>
5542 <term>
5543 <computeroutput>--variant</computeroutput>
5544 </term>
5545
5546 <listitem>
5547 <para>
5548 Set a file format variant for the output file. This is a
5549 comma-separated list of variant flags. Not all combinations
5550 are supported, and specifying inconsistent flags will result
5551 in an error message.
5552 </para>
5553 </listitem>
5554 </varlistentry>
5555
5556 <varlistentry>
5557 <term>
5558 <computeroutput>--existing</computeroutput>
5559 </term>
5560
5561 <listitem>
5562 <para>
5563 Perform the clone operation to an already existing
5564 destination medium. Only the portion of the source medium
5565 which fits into the destination medium is copied. This means
5566 if the destination medium is smaller than the source only a
5567 part of it is copied, and if the destination medium is
5568 larger than the source the remaining part of the destination
5569 medium is unchanged.
5570 </para>
5571 </listitem>
5572 </varlistentry>
5573
5574 </variablelist>
5575
5576 <note>
5577 <para>
5578 For compatibility with earlier versions of &product-name;, the
5579 <command>clonevdi</command> and <command>clonehd</command>
5580 commands are still supported and mapped internally to the
5581 <command>clonehd disk</command> command.
5582 </para>
5583 </note>
5584
5585 </sect1>
5586
5587 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-mediumproperty">
5588
5589 <title>VBoxManage mediumproperty</title>
5590
5591 <para>
5592 This command sets, gets, or deletes a medium property. The syntax
5593 is as follows:
5594 </para>
5595
5596<screen>VBoxManage mediumproperty [disk|dvd|floppy] set &lt;uuid|filename&gt;
5597 &lt;property&gt; &lt;value&gt;</screen>
5598
5599 <itemizedlist>
5600
5601 <listitem>
5602 <para>
5603 Use <computeroutput>&lt;disk|dvd|floppy&gt;</computeroutput>
5604 to optionally specify the type of medium: disk (hard drive),
5605 dvd, or floppy.
5606 </para>
5607 </listitem>
5608
5609 <listitem>
5610 <para>
5611 Use <computeroutput>&lt;uuid|filename&gt;</computeroutput> to
5612 supply either the UUID or absolute path of the medium or
5613 image.
5614 </para>
5615 </listitem>
5616
5617 <listitem>
5618 <para>
5619 Use <computeroutput>&lt;property&gt;</computeroutput> to
5620 supply the name of the property.
5621 </para>
5622 </listitem>
5623
5624 <listitem>
5625 <para>
5626 Use <computeroutput>&lt;value&gt;</computeroutput> to supply
5627 the property value.
5628 </para>
5629 </listitem>
5630
5631 </itemizedlist>
5632
5633<screen>VBoxManage mediumproperty [disk|dvd|floppy] get &lt;uuid|filename&gt;
5634 &lt;property&gt;</screen>
5635
5636 <itemizedlist>
5637
5638 <listitem>
5639 <para>
5640 Use <computeroutput>&lt;disk|dvd|floppy&gt;</computeroutput>
5641 to optionally specify the type of medium: disk (hard drive),
5642 dvd, or floppy.
5643 </para>
5644 </listitem>
5645
5646 <listitem>
5647 <para>
5648 Use <computeroutput>&lt;uuid|filename&gt;</computeroutput> to
5649 supply either the UUID or absolute path of the medium or
5650 image.
5651 </para>
5652 </listitem>
5653
5654 <listitem>
5655 <para>
5656 Use <computeroutput>&lt;property&gt;</computeroutput> to
5657 supply the name of the property.
5658 </para>
5659 </listitem>
5660
5661 </itemizedlist>
5662
5663<screen>VBoxManage mediumproperty [disk|dvd|floppy] delete &lt;uuid|filename&gt;
5664 &lt;property&gt;</screen>
5665
5666 <itemizedlist>
5667
5668 <listitem>
5669 <para>
5670 Use <computeroutput>&lt;disk|dvd|floppy&gt;</computeroutput>
5671 to optionally specify the type of medium: disk (hard drive),
5672 dvd, or floppy.
5673 </para>
5674 </listitem>
5675
5676 <listitem>
5677 <para>
5678 Use <computeroutput>&lt;uuid|filename&gt;</computeroutput> to
5679 supply either the UUID or absolute path of the medium or
5680 image.
5681 </para>
5682 </listitem>
5683
5684 <listitem>
5685 <para>
5686 Use <computeroutput>&lt;property&gt;</computeroutput> to
5687 supply the name of the property.
5688 </para>
5689 </listitem>
5690
5691 </itemizedlist>
5692
5693 </sect1>
5694
5695 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-encryptmedium">
5696
5697 <title>VBoxManage encryptmedium</title>
5698
5699 <para>
5700 This command is used to create a DEK encrypted medium or image.
5701 See <xref linkend="diskencryption-encryption" />.
5702 </para>
5703
5704 <para>
5705 The syntax is as follows:
5706 </para>
5707
5708<screen>VBoxManage encryptmedium &lt;uuid|filename&gt;
5709 [--newpassword &lt;file|-&gt;]
5710 [--oldpassword &lt;file|-&gt;]
5711 [--cipher &lt;cipher id&gt;]
5712 [--newpasswordid &lt;password id&gt;]</screen>
5713
5714 <itemizedlist>
5715
5716 <listitem>
5717 <para>
5718 Use <computeroutput>&lt;uuid|filename&gt;</computeroutput> to
5719 supply the UUID or absolute path of the medium or image to be
5720 encrypted.
5721 </para>
5722 </listitem>
5723
5724 <listitem>
5725 <para>
5726 Use <computeroutput>--newpassword
5727 &lt;file|-&gt;</computeroutput> to supply a new encryption
5728 password. Either specify the absolute pathname of a password
5729 file on the host operating system, or
5730 <computeroutput>-</computeroutput> to prompt you for the
5731 password on the command line. Always use the
5732 <computeroutput>--newpasswordid</computeroutput> option with
5733 this option.
5734 </para>
5735 </listitem>
5736
5737 <listitem>
5738 <para>
5739 Use <computeroutput>--oldpassword
5740 &lt;file|-&gt;</computeroutput> to supply any old encryption
5741 password. Either specify the absolute pathname of a password
5742 file on the host operating system, or
5743 <computeroutput>-</computeroutput> to prompt you for the old
5744 password on the command line.
5745 </para>
5746
5747 <para>
5748 Use this option to gain access to an encrypted medium or image
5749 to either change its password using
5750 <computeroutput>--newpassword</computeroutput> or change its
5751 encryption using <computeroutput>--cipher</computeroutput>.
5752 </para>
5753 </listitem>
5754
5755 <listitem>
5756 <para>
5757 Use <computeroutput>--cipher &lt;cipher&gt;</computeroutput>
5758 to specify the cipher to use for encryption. This can be
5759 either <computeroutput>AES-XTS128-PLAIN64</computeroutput> or
5760 <computeroutput>AES-XTS256-PLAIN64</computeroutput>.
5761 </para>
5762
5763 <para>
5764 Use this option to change any existing encryption on the
5765 medium or image, or to set up new encryption on it for the
5766 first time.
5767 </para>
5768 </listitem>
5769
5770 <listitem>
5771 <para>
5772 Use <computeroutput>--newpasswordid &lt;password
5773 id&gt;</computeroutput> to supply the new password identifier.
5774 This can be chosen by the user, and is used for correct
5775 identification when supplying multiple passwords during VM
5776 startup.
5777 </para>
5778
5779 <para>
5780 If the user uses the same password when encrypting multiple
5781 images and also the same password identifier, the user needs
5782 to supply the password only once during VM startup.
5783 </para>
5784 </listitem>
5785
5786 </itemizedlist>
5787
5788 </sect1>
5789
5790 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-checkmediumpwd">
5791
5792 <title>VBoxManage checkmediumpwd</title>
5793
5794 <para>
5795 This command is used to check the current encryption password on a
5796 DEK encrypted medium or image. See
5797 <xref linkend="diskencryption-encryption" />.
5798 </para>
5799
5800 <para>
5801 The syntax is as follows:
5802 </para>
5803
5804<screen>VBoxManage checkmediumpwd &lt;uuid|filename&gt;
5805 &lt;pwd file|-&gt;</screen>
5806
5807 <itemizedlist>
5808
5809 <listitem>
5810 <para>
5811 Use <computeroutput>&lt;uuid|filename&gt;</computeroutput> to
5812 supply the UUID or absolute path of the medium or image to be
5813 checked.
5814 </para>
5815 </listitem>
5816
5817 <listitem>
5818 <para>
5819 Use <computeroutput>&lt;pwd file|-&gt;</computeroutput> to
5820 supply the password identifier to be checked. Either specify
5821 the absolute pathname of a password file on the host operating
5822 system, or <computeroutput>-</computeroutput> to prompt you
5823 for the password on the command line.
5824 </para>
5825 </listitem>
5826
5827 </itemizedlist>
5828
5829 </sect1>
5830
5831 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-convertfromraw">
5832
5833 <title>VBoxManage convertfromraw</title>
5834
5835 <para>
5836 This command converts a raw disk image to a &product-name; Disk
5837 Image (VDI) file. The syntax is as follows:
5838 </para>
5839
5840<screen>VBoxManage convertfromraw &lt;filename&gt; &lt;outputfile&gt;
5841 [--format VDI|VMDK|VHD]
5842 [--variant Standard,Fixed,Split2G,Stream,ESX]
5843 [--uuid &lt;uuid&gt;]
5844VBoxManage convertfromraw stdin &lt;outputfile&gt; &lt;bytes&gt;
5845 [--format VDI|VMDK|VHD]
5846 [--variant Standard,Fixed,Split2G,Stream,ESX]
5847 [--uuid &lt;uuid&gt;]</screen>
5848
5849 <para>
5850 The parameters are as follows:
5851 </para>
5852
5853 <variablelist>
5854
5855 <varlistentry>
5856 <term>
5857 <computeroutput>--bytes</computeroutput>
5858 </term>
5859
5860 <listitem>
5861 <para>
5862 The size of the image file, in bytes, provided through
5863 stdin.
5864 </para>
5865 </listitem>
5866 </varlistentry>
5867
5868 <varlistentry>
5869 <term>
5870 <computeroutput>--format</computeroutput>
5871 </term>
5872
5873 <listitem>
5874 <para>
5875 Select the disk image format to create. The default format
5876 is VDI. Other options are VMDK and VHD.
5877 </para>
5878 </listitem>
5879 </varlistentry>
5880
5881 <varlistentry>
5882 <term>
5883 <computeroutput>--variant</computeroutput>
5884 </term>
5885
5886 <listitem>
5887 <para>
5888 Choose a file format variant for the output file. This is a
5889 comma-separated list of variant flags. Not all combinations
5890 are supported, and specifying inconsistent flags will result
5891 in an error message.
5892 </para>
5893 </listitem>
5894 </varlistentry>
5895
5896 <varlistentry>
5897 <term>
5898 <computeroutput>--uuid</computeroutput>
5899 </term>
5900
5901 <listitem>
5902 <para>
5903 Specify the UUID of the output file.
5904 </para>
5905 </listitem>
5906 </varlistentry>
5907
5908 </variablelist>
5909
5910 <para>
5911 The <command>stdin</command> form of the command forces
5912 <command>VBoxManage</command> to read the content of the disk
5913 image from standard input. This useful when using the command in a
5914 pipe.
5915 </para>
5916
5917 <note>
5918 <para>
5919 For compatibility with earlier versions of &product-name;, the
5920 <command>convertdd</command> command is also supported and
5921 mapped internally to the <command>convertfromraw</command>
5922 command.
5923 </para>
5924 </note>
5925
5926 </sect1>
5927
5928 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-extradata">
5929
5930 <title>VBoxManage getextradata/setextradata</title>
5931
5932 <para>
5933 These commands enable you to attach and retrieve string data for a
5934 virtual machine or for a &product-name; configuration, by
5935 specifying <computeroutput>global</computeroutput> instead of a
5936 virtual machine name. You must specify a keyword as a text string
5937 to associate the data with, which you can later use to retrieve
5938 it. For example:
5939 </para>
5940
5941<screen>VBoxManage setextradata Fedora5 installdate 2006.01.01
5942VBoxManage setextradata SUSE10 installdate 2006.02.02</screen>
5943
5944 <para>
5945 This example would associate the string "2006.01.01" with the
5946 keyword installdate for the virtual machine Fedora5, and
5947 "2006.02.02" on the machine SUSE10. You could then retrieve the
5948 information as follows:
5949 </para>
5950
5951<screen>VBoxManage getextradata Fedora5 installdate</screen>
5952
5953 <para>
5954 This would return the following:
5955 </para>
5956
5957<screen>VirtualBox Command Line Management Interface Version <replaceable>version-number</replaceable>
5958(C) 2005-2018 Oracle Corporation
5959All rights reserved.
5960
5961Value: 2006.01.01</screen>
5962
5963 <para>
5964 You could retrieve the information for all keywords as follows:
5965 </para>
5966
5967<screen>VBoxManage getextradata Fedora5 enumerate</screen>
5968
5969 <para>
5970 To remove a keyword, the <command>setextradata</command> command
5971 must be run without specifying data, only the keyword. For
5972 example:
5973 </para>
5974
5975<screen>VBoxManage setextradata Fedora5 installdate</screen>
5976
5977 </sect1>
5978
5979 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-setproperty">
5980
5981 <title>VBoxManage setproperty</title>
5982
5983 <para>
5984 This command is used to change global settings which affect the
5985 entire &product-name; installation. Some of these correspond to
5986 the settings in the <emphasis role="bold">Global
5987 Settings</emphasis> dialog in the graphical user interface. The
5988 following properties are available:
5989 </para>
5990
5991 <variablelist>
5992
5993 <varlistentry>
5994 <term>
5995 <computeroutput>machinefolder</computeroutput>
5996 </term>
5997
5998 <listitem>
5999 <para>
6000 Specifies the default folder in which virtual machine
6001 definitions are kept. See <xref linkend="vboxconfigdata" />.
6002 </para>
6003 </listitem>
6004 </varlistentry>
6005
6006 <varlistentry>
6007 <term>
6008 <computeroutput>hwvirtexclusive</computeroutput>
6009 </term>
6010
6011 <listitem>
6012 <para>
6013 Specifies whether &product-name; will make exclusive use of
6014 the hardware virtualization extensions (Intel VT-x or AMD-V)
6015 of the host system's processor. See
6016 <xref linkend="hwvirt" />. If you wish to share these
6017 extensions with other hypervisors running at the same time,
6018 you must disable this setting. Doing so has negative
6019 performance implications.
6020 </para>
6021 </listitem>
6022 </varlistentry>
6023
6024 <varlistentry>
6025 <term>
6026 <computeroutput>vrdeauthlibrary</computeroutput>
6027 </term>
6028
6029 <listitem>
6030 <para>
6031 Specifies which library to use when external authentication
6032 has been selected for a particular virtual machine. See
6033 <xref linkend="vbox-auth" />.
6034 </para>
6035 </listitem>
6036 </varlistentry>
6037
6038 <varlistentry>
6039 <term>
6040 <computeroutput>websrvauthlibrary</computeroutput>
6041 </term>
6042
6043 <listitem>
6044 <para>
6045 Specifies which library the web service uses to authenticate
6046 users. For details about the &product-name; web service, see
6047 the &product-name; SDK reference,
6048 <xref
6049 linkend="VirtualBoxAPI" />.
6050 </para>
6051 </listitem>
6052 </varlistentry>
6053
6054 <varlistentry>
6055 <term>
6056 <computeroutput>vrdeextpack</computeroutput>
6057 </term>
6058
6059 <listitem>
6060 <para>
6061 Specifies which library implements the VirtualBox Remote
6062 Desktop Extension.
6063 </para>
6064 </listitem>
6065 </varlistentry>
6066
6067 <varlistentry>
6068 <term>
6069 <computeroutput>loghistorycount</computeroutput>
6070 </term>
6071
6072 <listitem>
6073 <para>
6074 Selects how many rotated VM logs are retained.
6075 </para>
6076 </listitem>
6077 </varlistentry>
6078
6079 <varlistentry>
6080 <term>
6081 <computeroutput>autostartdbpath</computeroutput>
6082 </term>
6083
6084 <listitem>
6085 <para>
6086 Selects the path to the autostart database. See
6087 <xref linkend="autostart" />.
6088 </para>
6089 </listitem>
6090 </varlistentry>
6091
6092 <varlistentry>
6093 <term>
6094 <computeroutput>defaultfrontend</computeroutput>
6095 </term>
6096
6097 <listitem>
6098 <para>
6099 Selects the global default VM frontend setting. See
6100 <xref linkend="vboxmanage-startvm" />.
6101 </para>
6102 </listitem>
6103 </varlistentry>
6104
6105 <varlistentry>
6106 <term>
6107 <computeroutput>logginglevel</computeroutput>
6108 </term>
6109
6110 <listitem>
6111 <para>
6112 Configures the VBoxSVC release logging details. See
6113 <ulink url="http://www.virtualbox.org/wiki/VBoxLogging">http://www.virtualbox.org/wiki/VBoxLogging</ulink>.
6114 </para>
6115 </listitem>
6116 </varlistentry>
6117
6118 <varlistentry>
6119 <term>
6120 <computeroutput>proxymode</computeroutput>
6121 </term>
6122
6123 <listitem>
6124 <para>
6125 Configures the mode for an HTTP proxy server.
6126 </para>
6127 </listitem>
6128 </varlistentry>
6129
6130 <varlistentry>
6131 <term>
6132 <computeroutput>proxyurl</computeroutput>
6133 </term>
6134
6135 <listitem>
6136 <para>
6137 Configures the URL for an HTTP proxy server. Used when a
6138 manual proxy is configured using the
6139 <computeroutput>manual</computeroutput> setting of the
6140 <computeroutput>proxymode</computeroutput> property.
6141 </para>
6142 </listitem>
6143 </varlistentry>
6144
6145 </variablelist>
6146
6147 </sect1>
6148
6149 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-usbfilter">
6150
6151 <title>VBoxManage usbfilter add/modify/remove</title>
6152
6153<screen>VBoxManage usbfilter add &lt;index,0-N&gt;
6154 --target &lt;uuid|vmname&gt;global
6155 --name &lt;string&gt;
6156 --action ignore|hold (global filters only)
6157 [--active yes|no (yes)]
6158 [--vendorid &lt;XXXX&gt; (null)]
6159 [--productid &lt;XXXX&gt; (null)]
6160 [--revision &lt;IIFF&gt; (null)]
6161 [--manufacturer &lt;string&gt; (null)]
6162 [--product &lt;string&gt; (null)]
6163 [--remote yes|no (null, VM filters only)]
6164 [--serialnumber &lt;string&gt; (null)]
6165 [--maskedinterfaces &lt;XXXXXXXX&gt;]
6166 </screen>
6167
6168<screen>VBoxManage usbfilter modify &lt;index,0-N&gt;
6169 --target &lt;uuid|vmname&gt;global
6170 [--name &lt;string&gt;]
6171 [--action ignore|hold (global filters only)]
6172 [--active yes|no]
6173 [--vendorid &lt;XXXX&gt;]
6174 [--productid &lt;XXXX&gt;]
6175 [--revision &lt;IIFF&gt;]
6176 [--manufacturer &lt;string&gt;]
6177 [--product &lt;string&gt;]
6178 [--remote yes|no (null, VM filters only)]
6179 [--serialnumber &lt;string&gt;]
6180 [--maskedinterfaces &lt;XXXXXXXX&gt;]
6181 </screen>
6182
6183<screen>VBoxManage usbfilter remove &lt;index,0-N&gt;
6184 --target &lt;uuid|vmname&gt;global
6185 </screen>
6186
6187 <para>
6188 The <command>usbfilter</command> commands are used for working
6189 with USB filters in virtual machines, or global filters which
6190 affect the whole &product-name; setup. Global filters are applied
6191 before machine-specific filters, and may be used to prevent
6192 devices from being captured by any virtual machine. Global filters
6193 are always applied in a particular order, and only the first
6194 filter which fits a device is applied. For example, if the first
6195 global filter says to hold, or make available, a particular
6196 Kingston memory stick device and the second filter says to ignore
6197 all Kingston devices. That particular Kingston memory stick will
6198 be available to any machine with the appropriate filter, but no
6199 other Kingston device will.
6200 </para>
6201
6202 <para>
6203 When creating a USB filter using <command>usbfilter add</command>,
6204 you must supply three or four mandatory parameters. The index
6205 specifies the position in the list at which the filter should be
6206 placed. If there is already a filter at that position, then it and
6207 the following ones will be shifted back one place. Otherwise, the
6208 new filter will be added onto the end of the list. The
6209 <computeroutput>target</computeroutput> parameter selects the
6210 virtual machine that the filter should be attached to or use
6211 <computeroutput>global</computeroutput> to apply it to all virtual
6212 machines. <computeroutput>name</computeroutput> is a name for the
6213 new filter. For global filters,
6214 <computeroutput>action</computeroutput> says whether to allow VMs
6215 access to devices that fit the filter description (hold) or not to
6216 give them access (ignore). In addition, you should specify
6217 parameters to filter by. You can find the parameters for devices
6218 attached to your system using <command>VBoxManage list
6219 usbhost</command>. Finally, you can specify whether the filter
6220 should be active. For local filters, whether they are for local
6221 devices, remote devices over an RDP connection, or either.
6222 </para>
6223
6224 <para>
6225 When you modify a USB filter using <command>usbfilter
6226 modify</command>, you must specify the filter by index and by
6227 target, which is either a virtual machine or
6228 <computeroutput>global</computeroutput>. See the output of
6229 <command>VBoxManage list usbfilters</command> to find global
6230 filter indexes and <command>VBoxManage showvminfo</command> to
6231 find indexes for individual machines. The properties which can be
6232 changed are the same as for <command>usbfilter add</command>. To
6233 remove a filter, use <command>usbfilter remove</command> and
6234 specify the index and the target.
6235 </para>
6236
6237 <para>
6238 The following is a list of the additional <command>usbfilter
6239 add</command> and <command>usbfilter modify</command> options,
6240 with details of how to use them.
6241 </para>
6242
6243 <itemizedlist>
6244
6245 <listitem>
6246 <para>
6247 <computeroutput>--action ignore|hold</computeroutput>:
6248 Specifies whether devices that fit the filter description are
6249 allowed access by machines (hold), or have access denied
6250 (ignore). Applies to global filters only.
6251 </para>
6252 </listitem>
6253
6254 <listitem>
6255 <para>
6256 <computeroutput>--active yes|no</computeroutput>: Specifies
6257 whether the USB Filter is active or temporarily disabled. For
6258 <computeroutput>usbfilter create</computeroutput> the default
6259 is active.
6260 </para>
6261 </listitem>
6262
6263 <listitem>
6264 <para>
6265 <computeroutput>--vendorid &lt;XXXX&gt;|""</computeroutput>:
6266 Specifies a vendor ID filter. The string representation for an
6267 exact match has the form XXXX, where X is the hexadecimal
6268 digit, including leading zeroes.
6269 </para>
6270 </listitem>
6271
6272 <listitem>
6273 <para>
6274 <computeroutput>--productid &lt;XXXX&gt;|""</computeroutput>:
6275 Specifies a product ID filter. The string representation for
6276 an exact match has the form XXXX, where X is the hexadecimal
6277 digit, including leading zeroes.
6278 </para>
6279 </listitem>
6280
6281 <listitem>
6282 <para>
6283 <computeroutput>--revision &lt;IIFF&gt;|""</computeroutput>:
6284 Specifies a revision ID filter. The string representation for
6285 an exact match has the form IIFF, where I is the decimal digit
6286 of the integer part of the revision, and F is the decimal
6287 digit of its fractional part, including leading and trailing
6288 zeros. Note that for interval filters, it is best to use the
6289 hexadecimal form, because the revision is stored as a 16-bit
6290 packed BCD value. Therefore, the expression int:0x0100-0x0199
6291 will match any revision from 1.0 to 1.99 inclusive.
6292 </para>
6293 </listitem>
6294
6295 <listitem>
6296 <para>
6297 <computeroutput>--manufacturer
6298 &lt;string&gt;|""</computeroutput>: Specifies a manufacturer
6299 ID filter, as a string.
6300 </para>
6301 </listitem>
6302
6303 <listitem>
6304 <para>
6305 <computeroutput>--product &lt;string&gt;|""</computeroutput>:
6306 Specifies a product ID filter, as a string.
6307 </para>
6308 </listitem>
6309
6310 <listitem>
6311 <para>
6312 <computeroutput>--remote yes|no""</computeroutput>: Specifies
6313 a remote filter, indicating whether the device is physically
6314 connected to a remote VRDE client or to a local host machine.
6315 Applies to VM filters only.
6316 </para>
6317 </listitem>
6318
6319 <listitem>
6320 <para>
6321 <computeroutput>--serialnumber
6322 &lt;string&gt;|""</computeroutput>: Specifies a serial number
6323 filter, as a string.
6324 </para>
6325 </listitem>
6326
6327 <listitem>
6328 <para>
6329 <computeroutput>--maskedinterfaces
6330 &lt;XXXXXXXX&gt;</computeroutput>: Specifies a masked
6331 interface filter, for hiding one or more USB interfaces from
6332 the guest. The value is a bit mask where the set bits
6333 correspond to the USB interfaces that should be hidden, or
6334 masked off. This feature only works on Linux hosts.
6335 </para>
6336 </listitem>
6337
6338 </itemizedlist>
6339
6340 </sect1>
6341
6342 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-sharedfolder">
6343
6344 <title>VBoxManage sharedfolder add/remove</title>
6345
6346<screen>
6347VBoxManage sharedfolder add &lt;uuid|vmname&gt;
6348 --name &lt;name&gt; --hostpath &lt;hostpath&gt;
6349 [--transient] [--readonly] [--automount]
6350</screen>
6351
6352 <para>
6353 This command enables you to share folders on the host computer
6354 with guest operating systems. For this, the guest systems must
6355 have a version of the &product-name; Guest Additions installed
6356 which supports this functionality.
6357 </para>
6358
6359 <para>
6360 Parameters are as follows:
6361 </para>
6362
6363 <itemizedlist>
6364
6365 <listitem>
6366 <para>
6367 <computeroutput>&lt;uuid|vmname&gt;</computeroutput>:
6368 Specifies the UUID or name of the VM whose guest operating
6369 system will be sharing folders with the host computer.
6370 Mandatory.
6371 </para>
6372 </listitem>
6373
6374 <listitem>
6375 <para>
6376 <computeroutput>--name &lt;name&gt;</computeroutput>:
6377 Specifies the name of the share. Each share has a unique name
6378 within the namespace of the host operating system. Mandatory.
6379 </para>
6380 </listitem>
6381
6382 <listitem>
6383 <para>
6384 <computeroutput>-hostpath &lt;hostpath&gt;</computeroutput>:
6385 Specifies the absolute path on the host operating system of
6386 the directory to be shared with the guest operating system.
6387 Mandatory.
6388 </para>
6389 </listitem>
6390
6391 <listitem>
6392 <para>
6393 <computeroutput>-transient</computeroutput>: Specifies that
6394 the share is transient, meaning that it can be added and
6395 removed at runtime and does not persist after the VM has
6396 stopped. Optional.
6397 </para>
6398 </listitem>
6399
6400 <listitem>
6401 <para>
6402 <computeroutput>-readonly</computeroutput>: Specifies that the
6403 share has only read-only access to files at the host path.
6404 </para>
6405
6406 <para>
6407 By default, shared folders have read/write access to the files
6408 on the host path. On Linux distributions, shared folders are
6409 mounted with 770 file permissions with root user and vboxsf as
6410 the group. Using this option the file permissions change to
6411 700. Optional.
6412 </para>
6413 </listitem>
6414
6415 <listitem>
6416 <para>
6417 <computeroutput>-automount</computeroutput>: Specifies that
6418 the share will be automatically mounted. On Linux
6419 distributions, this will be to either
6420 <computeroutput>/media/USER/sf_&lt;name&gt;</computeroutput>
6421 or <computeroutput>/media/sf_&lt;name&gt;</computeroutput>,
6422 where &lt;name&gt; is the share named. The actual location
6423 depends on the guest OS. Optional.
6424 </para>
6425 </listitem>
6426
6427 </itemizedlist>
6428
6429<screen>
6430VBoxManage sharedfolder remove &lt;uuid|vmname&gt;
6431 --name &lt;name&gt; [--transient]
6432
6433</screen>
6434
6435 <para>
6436 This command enables you to delete shared folders on the host
6437 computer shares with the guest operating systems. For this, the
6438 guest systems must have a version of the &product-name; Guest
6439 Additions installed which supports this functionality.
6440 </para>
6441
6442 <para>
6443 Parameters are as follows:
6444 </para>
6445
6446 <itemizedlist>
6447
6448 <listitem>
6449 <para>
6450 <computeroutput>&lt;uuid|vmname&gt;</computeroutput>:
6451 Specifies the UUID or name of the VM whose guest operating
6452 system is sharing folders with the host computer. Mandatory.
6453 </para>
6454 </listitem>
6455
6456 <listitem>
6457 <para>
6458 <computeroutput>--name &lt;name&gt;</computeroutput>:
6459 Specifies the name of the share to be removed. Each share has
6460 a unique name within the namespace of the host operating
6461 system. Mandatory.
6462 </para>
6463 </listitem>
6464
6465 <listitem>
6466 <para>
6467 <computeroutput>-transient</computeroutput>: Specifies that
6468 the share is transient, meaning that it can be added and
6469 removed at runtime and does not persist after the VM has
6470 stopped. Optional.
6471 </para>
6472 </listitem>
6473
6474 </itemizedlist>
6475
6476 <para>
6477 Shared folders are described in <xref linkend="sharedfolders" />.
6478 </para>
6479
6480 </sect1>
6481
6482 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-guestproperty">
6483
6484 <title>VBoxManage guestproperty</title>
6485
6486 <para>
6487 The <command>guestproperty</command> commands enable you to get or
6488 set properties of a running virtual machine. See
6489 <xref linkend="guestadd-guestprops" />. Guest properties are
6490 arbitrary keyword-value string pairs which can be written to and
6491 read from by either the guest or the host, so they can be used as
6492 a low-volume communication channel for strings, provided that a
6493 guest is running and has the Guest Additions installed. In
6494 addition, a number of values whose keywords begin with
6495 <computeroutput>/VirtualBox/</computeroutput>are automatically set
6496 and maintained by the Guest Additions.
6497 </para>
6498
6499 <para>
6500 The following subcommands are available, where
6501 <computeroutput>&lt;vm&gt;</computeroutput> can either be a VM
6502 name or a VM UUID, as with the other <command>VBoxManage</command>
6503 commands:
6504 </para>
6505
6506 <itemizedlist>
6507
6508 <listitem>
6509 <para>
6510 <computeroutput>enumerate &lt;vm&gt; [--patterns
6511 &lt;pattern&gt;]</computeroutput>: Lists all the guest
6512 properties that are available for the given VM, including the
6513 value. This list will be very limited if the guest's service
6514 process cannot be contacted, for example because the VM is not
6515 running or the Guest Additions are not installed.
6516 </para>
6517
6518 <para>
6519 If <computeroutput>--patterns &lt;pattern&gt;</computeroutput>
6520 is specified, it acts as a filter to only list properties that
6521 match the given pattern. The pattern can contain the following
6522 wildcard characters:
6523 </para>
6524
6525 <itemizedlist>
6526
6527 <listitem>
6528 <para>
6529 <computeroutput>*</computeroutput> (asterisk): Represents
6530 any number of characters. For example,
6531 "<computeroutput>/VirtualBox*</computeroutput>" would
6532 match all properties beginning with "/VirtualBox".
6533 </para>
6534 </listitem>
6535
6536 <listitem>
6537 <para>
6538 <computeroutput>?</computeroutput> (question mark):
6539 Represents a single arbitrary character. For example,
6540 "<computeroutput>fo?</computeroutput>" would match both
6541 "foo" and "for".
6542 </para>
6543 </listitem>
6544
6545 <listitem>
6546 <para>
6547 <computeroutput>|</computeroutput> (pipe symbol): Can be
6548 used to specify multiple alternative patterns. For
6549 example, "<computeroutput>s*|t*</computeroutput>" would
6550 match anything starting with either "s" or "t".
6551 </para>
6552 </listitem>
6553
6554 </itemizedlist>
6555 </listitem>
6556
6557 <listitem>
6558 <para>
6559 <computeroutput>get &lt;vm&gt;
6560 &lt;property&gt;</computeroutput>: Retrieves the value of a
6561 single property only. If the property cannot be found, for
6562 example because the guest is not running, the following
6563 message is shown:
6564 </para>
6565
6566<screen>No value set!</screen>
6567 </listitem>
6568
6569 <listitem>
6570 <para>
6571 <computeroutput>set &lt;vm&gt; &lt;property&gt; [&lt;value&gt;
6572 [--flags &lt;flags&gt;]]</computeroutput>: Enables you to set
6573 a guest property by specifying the keyword and value. If
6574 <computeroutput>&lt;value&gt;</computeroutput> is omitted, the
6575 property is deleted. With
6576 <computeroutput>--flags</computeroutput>, you can specify
6577 additional behavior. You can combine several flags by
6578 separating them with commas.
6579 </para>
6580
6581 <itemizedlist>
6582
6583 <listitem>
6584 <para>
6585 <computeroutput>TRANSIENT</computeroutput>: The value will
6586 not be stored with the VM data when the VM exits.
6587 </para>
6588 </listitem>
6589
6590 <listitem>
6591 <para>
6592 <computeroutput>TRANSRESET</computeroutput>: The value
6593 will be deleted as soon as the VM restarts or exits.
6594 </para>
6595 </listitem>
6596
6597 <listitem>
6598 <para>
6599 <computeroutput>RDONLYGUEST</computeroutput>: The value
6600 can only be changed by the host, but the guest can only
6601 read it.
6602 </para>
6603 </listitem>
6604
6605 <listitem>
6606 <para>
6607 <computeroutput>RDONLYHOST</computeroutput>: The value can
6608 only be changed by the guest, but the host can only read
6609 it.
6610 </para>
6611 </listitem>
6612
6613 <listitem>
6614 <para>
6615 <computeroutput>READONLY</computeroutput>: The value
6616 cannot be changed at all.
6617 </para>
6618 </listitem>
6619
6620 </itemizedlist>
6621 </listitem>
6622
6623 <listitem>
6624 <para>
6625 <computeroutput>wait &lt;vm&gt; &lt;pattern&gt; --timeout
6626 &lt;timeout&gt;</computeroutput>: Waits for a particular value
6627 described by the pattern string to change or to be deleted or
6628 created. The pattern rules are the same as for the
6629 <command>enumerate</command> subcommand.
6630 </para>
6631 </listitem>
6632
6633 <listitem>
6634 <para>
6635 <computeroutput>delete &lt;vm&gt;
6636 &lt;property&gt;</computeroutput>: Deletes a guest property
6637 which has been set previously.
6638 </para>
6639 </listitem>
6640
6641 </itemizedlist>
6642
6643 </sect1>
6644
6645 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-guestcontrol">
6646
6647 <title>VBoxManage guestcontrol</title>
6648
6649 <para>
6650 The <command>guestcontrol</command> commands enable control of the
6651 guest from the host. See
6652 <xref
6653 linkend="guestadd-guestcontrol" /> for an introduction.
6654 </para>
6655
6656 <para>
6657 The <command>guestcontrol</command> command has two sets of
6658 subcommands. The first set requires guest credentials to be
6659 specified, the second does not.
6660 </para>
6661
6662 <para>
6663 The first set of subcommands is of the following form:
6664 </para>
6665
6666<screen>VBoxManage guestcontrol &lt;uuid|vmname&gt; &lt;sub-command&gt;
6667 [--username &lt;name&gt; ]
6668 [--passwordfile &lt;file&gt; | --password &lt;password&gt;]
6669 [--domain &lt;domain&gt; ]
6670 [-v|--verbose] [-q|quiet] ...
6671 </screen>
6672
6673 <para>
6674 The common options are as follows:
6675 </para>
6676
6677<screen>
6678 [--username &lt;name&gt; ]
6679 [--passwordfile &lt;file&gt; | --password &lt;password&gt;]
6680 [--domain &lt;domain&gt; ]
6681 [-v|--verbose] [-q|quiet]
6682 </screen>
6683
6684 <para>
6685 The common options for the first set of subcommands are explained
6686 in the following list.
6687 </para>
6688
6689 <variablelist>
6690
6691 <varlistentry>
6692 <term>
6693 <computeroutput>&lt;uuid|vmname&gt;</computeroutput>
6694 </term>
6695
6696 <listitem>
6697 <para>
6698 Specifies the VM UUID or VM name. Mandatory.
6699 </para>
6700 </listitem>
6701 </varlistentry>
6702
6703 <varlistentry>
6704 <term>
6705 <computeroutput>--username &lt;name&gt;</computeroutput>
6706 </term>
6707
6708 <listitem>
6709 <para>
6710 Specifies the user name on guest OS under which the process
6711 should run. This user name must already exist on the guest
6712 OS. If unspecified, the host user name is used. Optional
6713 </para>
6714 </listitem>
6715 </varlistentry>
6716
6717 <varlistentry>
6718 <term>
6719 <computeroutput>--passwordfile
6720 &lt;file&gt;|--password</computeroutput>
6721 </term>
6722
6723 <listitem>
6724 <para>
6725 Specifies the absolute path on guest file system of password
6726 file containing the password for the specified user account
6727 or password for the specified user account. Optional. If
6728 both are omitted, empty password is assumed.
6729 </para>
6730 </listitem>
6731 </varlistentry>
6732
6733 <varlistentry>
6734 <term>
6735 <computeroutput>--domain &lt;domain&gt;</computeroutput>
6736 </term>
6737
6738 <listitem>
6739 <para>
6740 User domain for Windows guests. Optional.
6741 </para>
6742 </listitem>
6743 </varlistentry>
6744
6745 <varlistentry>
6746 <term>
6747 <computeroutput>-v|--verbose</computeroutput>
6748 </term>
6749
6750 <listitem>
6751 <para>
6752 Makes the subcommand execution more verbose. Optional
6753 </para>
6754 </listitem>
6755 </varlistentry>
6756
6757 <varlistentry>
6758 <term>
6759 <computeroutput>-q|--quiet</computeroutput>
6760 </term>
6761
6762 <listitem>
6763 <para>
6764 Makes the subcommand execution quieter. Optional.
6765 </para>
6766 </listitem>
6767 </varlistentry>
6768
6769 </variablelist>
6770
6771 <para>
6772 The first set of subcommands are as follows:
6773 </para>
6774
6775 <itemizedlist>
6776
6777 <listitem>
6778 <para>
6779 <computeroutput>run</computeroutput>: Executes a guest
6780 program, forwarding stdout, stderr, and stdin to and from the
6781 host until it completes.
6782 </para>
6783
6784<screen>VBoxManage guestcontrol &lt;uuid|vmname&gt; run [common-options]
6785 --exe &lt;path to executable&gt; [--timeout &lt;msec&gt;]
6786 [-E|--putenv &lt;NAME&gt;[=&lt;VALUE&gt;]] [--unquoted-args]
6787 [--ignore-operhaned-processes] [--profile]
6788 [--no-wait-stdout|--wait-stdout]
6789 [--no-wait-stderr|--wait-stderr]
6790 [--dos2unix] [--unix2dos]
6791 -- &lt;program/arg0&gt; [argument1] ... [argumentN]]
6792 </screen>
6793
6794 <variablelist>
6795
6796 <varlistentry>
6797 <term>
6798 <computeroutput>&lt;uuid|vmname&gt;</computeroutput>
6799 </term>
6800
6801 <listitem>
6802 <para>
6803 Specifies the VM UUID or VM name. Mandatory.
6804 </para>
6805 </listitem>
6806 </varlistentry>
6807
6808 <varlistentry>
6809 <term>
6810 <computeroutput>--exe &lt;path to
6811 executable&gt;</computeroutput>
6812 </term>
6813
6814 <listitem>
6815 <para>
6816 Specifies the absolute path of the executable on the
6817 guest OS file system. Mandatory. For example:
6818 <computeroutput>C:\Windows\System32\calc.exe</computeroutput>.
6819 </para>
6820 </listitem>
6821 </varlistentry>
6822
6823 <varlistentry>
6824 <term>
6825 <computeroutput>--timeout &lt;msec&gt;</computeroutput>
6826 </term>
6827
6828 <listitem>
6829 <para>
6830 Specifies the maximum time, in microseconds, that the
6831 executable can run, during which
6832 <command>VBoxManage</command> receives its output.
6833 Optional. If unspecified, <command>VBoxManage</command>
6834 waits indefinitely for the process to end, or an error
6835 occurs.
6836 </para>
6837 </listitem>
6838 </varlistentry>
6839
6840 <varlistentry>
6841 <term>
6842 <computeroutput>-E|--putenv
6843 &lt;NAME&gt;=&lt;VALUE&gt;</computeroutput>
6844 </term>
6845
6846 <listitem>
6847 <para>
6848 Sets, modifies, and unsets environment variables in the
6849 environment in which the program will run. Optional.
6850 </para>
6851
6852 <para>
6853 The guest process is created with the standard default
6854 guest OS environment. Use this option to modify that
6855 default environment. To set or modify a variable use:
6856 <computeroutput>&lt;NAME&gt;=&lt;VALUE&gt;</computeroutput>.
6857 To unset a variable use:
6858 <computeroutput>&lt;NAME&gt;=</computeroutput>
6859 </para>
6860
6861 <para>
6862 Any spaces in names and values should be enclosed by
6863 quotes.
6864 </para>
6865
6866 <para>
6867 To set, modify, and unset multiple variables, use
6868 multiple instances of the
6869 <computeroutput>--E|--putenv</computeroutput> option.
6870 </para>
6871 </listitem>
6872 </varlistentry>
6873
6874 <varlistentry>
6875 <term>
6876 <computeroutput>--unquoted-args</computeroutput>
6877 </term>
6878
6879 <listitem>
6880 <para>
6881 Disables escaped double quoting, such as \"fred\", on
6882 arguments passed to the executed program. Optional.
6883 </para>
6884 </listitem>
6885 </varlistentry>
6886
6887 <varlistentry>
6888 <term>
6889 <computeroutput>--ignore-operhaned-processes</computeroutput>
6890 </term>
6891
6892 <listitem>
6893 <para>
6894 Ignore orphaned processes. Not yet implemented.
6895 Optional.
6896 </para>
6897 </listitem>
6898 </varlistentry>
6899
6900 <varlistentry>
6901 <term>
6902 <computeroutput>--profile</computeroutput>
6903 </term>
6904
6905 <listitem>
6906 <para>
6907 Use Profile. Not yet implemented. Optional.
6908 </para>
6909 </listitem>
6910 </varlistentry>
6911
6912 <varlistentry>
6913 <term>
6914 <computeroutput>--no-wait-stdout|--wait-stdout</computeroutput>
6915 </term>
6916
6917 <listitem>
6918 <para>
6919 Does not wait or waits until the guest process ends and
6920 receives its exit code and reason/flags. In the case of
6921 <computeroutput>--wait-stdout</computeroutput>,
6922 <command>VBoxManage</command> receives its stdout while
6923 the process runs. Optional.
6924 </para>
6925 </listitem>
6926 </varlistentry>
6927
6928 <varlistentry>
6929 <term>
6930 <computeroutput>--no-wait-stderr|--wait-stderr</computeroutput>
6931 </term>
6932
6933 <listitem>
6934 <para>
6935 Does not wait or waits until the guest process ends and
6936 receives its exit code, error messages, and flags. In
6937 the case of
6938 <computeroutput>--wait-stderr</computeroutput>,
6939 <command>VBoxManage</command> receives its stderr while
6940 the process runs. Optional.
6941 </para>
6942 </listitem>
6943 </varlistentry>
6944
6945 <varlistentry>
6946 <term>
6947 <computeroutput>--dos2unix</computeroutput>
6948 </term>
6949
6950 <listitem>
6951 <para>
6952 Converts output from DOS/Windows guests to
6953 UNIX/Linux-compatible line endings, CR + LF to LF. Not
6954 yet implemented. Optional.
6955 </para>
6956 </listitem>
6957 </varlistentry>
6958
6959 <varlistentry>
6960 <term>
6961 <computeroutput>--unix2dos</computeroutput>
6962 </term>
6963
6964 <listitem>
6965 <para>
6966 Converts output from a UNIX/Linux guests to
6967 DOS/Windows-compatible line endings, LF to CR + LF. Not
6968 yet implemented. Optional.
6969 </para>
6970 </listitem>
6971 </varlistentry>
6972
6973 <varlistentry>
6974 <term>
6975 <computeroutput>[-- &lt;program/arg0&gt;
6976 [&lt;argument1&gt;] ...
6977 [&lt;argumentN&gt;]]</computeroutput>
6978 </term>
6979
6980 <listitem>
6981 <para>
6982 Specifies the program name, followed by one or more
6983 arguments to pass to the program. Optional.
6984 </para>
6985
6986 <para>
6987 Any spaces in arguments should be enclosed by quotes.
6988 </para>
6989 </listitem>
6990 </varlistentry>
6991
6992 </variablelist>
6993
6994 <note>
6995 <para>
6996 On Windows there are certain limitations for graphical
6997 applications. See <xref linkend="KnownIssues" />.
6998 </para>
6999 </note>
7000
7001 <para>
7002 Examples of using the <command>guestcontrol run</command>
7003 command are as follows:
7004 </para>
7005
7006<screen>VBoxManage --nologo guestcontrol "My VM" run --exe "/bin/ls"
7007 --username foo --passwordfile bar.txt --wait-exit --wait-stdout -- -l /usr</screen>
7008
7009<screen>VBoxManage --nologo guestcontrol "My VM" run --exe "c:\\windows\\system32\\ipconfig.exe"
7010 --username foo --passwordfile bar.txt --wait-exit --wait-stdout</screen>
7011
7012 <para>
7013 Note that the double backslashes in the second example are
7014 only required on UNIX hosts.
7015 </para>
7016
7017 <note>
7018 <para>
7019 For certain commands a user name of an existing user account
7020 on the guest must be specified. Anonymous executions are not
7021 supported for security reasons. A user account password,
7022 however, is optional and depends on the guest's OS security
7023 policy or rules. If no password is specified for a given
7024 user name, an empty password will be used. On certain OSes
7025 like Windows the security policy may needs to be adjusted in
7026 order to allow user accounts with an empty password set.
7027 Also, global domain rules might apply and therefore cannot
7028 be changed.
7029 </para>
7030 </note>
7031
7032 <para>
7033 Starting at &product-name; 4.1.2 guest process execution by
7034 default is limited to serve up to five guest processes at a
7035 time. If a new guest process gets started which would exceed
7036 this limit, the oldest not running guest process will be
7037 discarded in order to be able to run that new process. Also,
7038 retrieving output from this old guest process will not be
7039 possible anymore then. If all five guest processes are still
7040 active and running, starting a new guest process will result
7041 in an appropriate error message.
7042 </para>
7043
7044 <para>
7045 To raise or lower the guest process execution limit, either
7046 use the guest property
7047 <computeroutput>/VirtualBox/GuestAdd/VBoxService/--control-procs-max-kept</computeroutput>
7048 or <command>VBoxService</command> command line by specifying
7049 <computeroutput>--control-procs-max-kept</computeroutput>
7050 needs to be modified. A restart of the guest OS is required
7051 afterwards. To serve unlimited guest processes, a value of
7052 <computeroutput>0</computeroutput> needs to be set, but this
7053 is not recommended.
7054 </para>
7055 </listitem>
7056
7057 <listitem>
7058 <para>
7059 <computeroutput>start</computeroutput>: Executes a guest
7060 program until it completes.
7061 </para>
7062
7063<screen>VBoxManage guestcontrol &lt;uuid|vmname&gt; start [common-options]
7064 [--exe &lt;path to executable&gt;] [--timeout &lt;msec&gt;]
7065 [-E|--putenv &lt;NAME&gt;[=&lt;VALUE&gt;]] [--unquoted-args]
7066 [--ignore-operhaned-processes] [--profile]
7067 -- &lt;program/arg0&gt; [argument1] ... [argumentN]]
7068 </screen>
7069
7070 <para>
7071 Where the options are as follows:
7072 </para>
7073
7074 <variablelist>
7075
7076 <varlistentry>
7077 <term>
7078 <computeroutput>&lt;uuid|vmname&gt;</computeroutput>
7079 </term>
7080
7081 <listitem>
7082 <para>
7083 Specifies the VM UUID or VM name. Mandatory.
7084 </para>
7085 </listitem>
7086 </varlistentry>
7087
7088 <varlistentry>
7089 <term>
7090 <computeroutput>--exe &lt;path to
7091 executable&gt;</computeroutput>
7092 </term>
7093
7094 <listitem>
7095 <para>
7096 Specifies the absolute path of the executable on the
7097 guest OS file system. Mandatory. For example:
7098 <computeroutput>C:\Windows\System32\calc.exe</computeroutput>
7099 </para>
7100 </listitem>
7101 </varlistentry>
7102
7103 <varlistentry>
7104 <term>
7105 <computeroutput>--timeout &lt;msec&gt;</computeroutput>
7106 </term>
7107
7108 <listitem>
7109 <para>
7110 Specifies the maximum time, in microseconds, that the
7111 executable can run. Optional. If unspecified,
7112 <command>VBoxManage</command> waits indefinitely for the
7113 process to end, or an error occurs.
7114 </para>
7115 </listitem>
7116 </varlistentry>
7117
7118 <varlistentry>
7119 <term>
7120 <computeroutput>-E|--putenv
7121 &lt;NAME&gt;=&lt;VALUE&gt;</computeroutput>
7122 </term>
7123
7124 <listitem>
7125 <para>
7126 Sets, modifies, and unsets environment variables in the
7127 environment in which the program will run. Optional.
7128 </para>
7129
7130 <para>
7131 The guest process is created with the standard default
7132 guest OS environment. Use this option to modify that
7133 default environment. To set or modify a variable use:
7134 <computeroutput>&lt;NAME&gt;=&lt;VALUE&gt;</computeroutput>.
7135 To unset a variable use:
7136 <computeroutput>&lt;NAME&gt;=</computeroutput>
7137 </para>
7138
7139 <para>
7140 Any spaces in names and values should be enclosed by
7141 quotes.
7142 </para>
7143
7144 <para>
7145 To set, modify, or unset multiple variables, use
7146 multiple instances of the
7147 <computeroutput>--E|--putenv</computeroutput> option.
7148 </para>
7149 </listitem>
7150 </varlistentry>
7151
7152 <varlistentry>
7153 <term>
7154 <computeroutput>--unquoted-args</computeroutput>
7155 </term>
7156
7157 <listitem>
7158 <para>
7159 Disables escaped double quoting, such as \"fred\", on
7160 arguments passed to the executed program. Optional.
7161 </para>
7162 </listitem>
7163 </varlistentry>
7164
7165 <varlistentry>
7166 <term>
7167 <computeroutput>--ignore-operhaned-processes</computeroutput>
7168 </term>
7169
7170 <listitem>
7171 <para>
7172 Ignores orphaned processes. Not yet implemented.
7173 Optional.
7174 </para>
7175 </listitem>
7176 </varlistentry>
7177
7178 <varlistentry>
7179 <term>
7180 <computeroutput>--profile</computeroutput>
7181 </term>
7182
7183 <listitem>
7184 <para>
7185 Use a profile. Not yet implemented. Optional.
7186 </para>
7187 </listitem>
7188 </varlistentry>
7189
7190 <varlistentry>
7191 <term>
7192 <computeroutput>[-- &lt;program/arg0&gt;
7193 [&lt;argument1&gt;] ...
7194 [&lt;argumentN&gt;]]</computeroutput>
7195 </term>
7196
7197 <listitem>
7198 <para>
7199 Specifies the program name, followed by one or more
7200 arguments to pass to the program. Optional.
7201 </para>
7202
7203 <para>
7204 Any spaces in arguments should be enclosed by quotes.
7205 </para>
7206 </listitem>
7207 </varlistentry>
7208
7209 </variablelist>
7210
7211 <note>
7212 <para>
7213 On Windows there are certain limitations for graphical
7214 applications. See <xref linkend="KnownIssues" />.
7215 </para>
7216 </note>
7217
7218 <para>
7219 Examples of using the <command>guestcontrol start</command>
7220 command are as follows:
7221 </para>
7222
7223<screen>VBoxManage --nologo guestcontrol "My VM" start --exe "/bin/ls"
7224 --username foo --passwordfile bar.txt --wait-exit --wait-stdout -- -l /usr</screen>
7225
7226<screen>VBoxManage --nologo guestcontrol "My VM" start --exe "c:\\windows\\system32\\ipconfig.exe"
7227 --username foo --passwordfile bar.txt --wait-exit --wait-stdout</screen>
7228
7229 <para>
7230 Note that the double backslashes in the second example are
7231 only required on UNIX hosts.
7232 </para>
7233
7234 <note>
7235 <para>
7236 For certain commands a user name of an existing user account
7237 on the guest must be specified. Anonymous executions are not
7238 supported for security reasons. A user account password,
7239 however, is optional and depends on the guest's OS security
7240 policy or rules. If no password is specified for a given
7241 user name, an empty password will be used. On certain OSes
7242 like Windows the security policy may needs to be adjusted in
7243 order to allow user accounts with an empty password set.
7244 Also, global domain rules might apply and therefore cannot
7245 be changed.
7246 </para>
7247 </note>
7248
7249 <para>
7250 Starting at &product-name; 4.1.2 guest process execution by
7251 default is limited to serve up to five guest processes at a
7252 time. If a new guest process gets started which would exceed
7253 this limit, the oldest not running guest process will be
7254 discarded in order to be able to run that new process. Also,
7255 retrieving output from this old guest process will not be
7256 possible anymore then. If all five guest processes are still
7257 active and running, starting a new guest process will result
7258 in an appropriate error message.
7259 </para>
7260
7261 <para>
7262 To raise or lower the guest process execution limit, either
7263 use the guest property
7264 <computeroutput>/VirtualBox/GuestAdd/VBoxService/--control-procs-max-kept</computeroutput>
7265 or <command>VBoxService</command> command line by specifying
7266 <computeroutput>--control-procs-max-kept</computeroutput>
7267 needs to be modified. A restart of the guest OS is required
7268 afterwards. To serve unlimited guest processes, a value of
7269 <computeroutput>0</computeroutput> needs to be set, but this
7270 is not recommended.
7271 </para>
7272 </listitem>
7273
7274 <listitem>
7275 <para>
7276 <computeroutput>copyfrom</computeroutput>: Copies files from
7277 the guest to the host file system. Only available with Guest
7278 Additions 4.0 or later installed.
7279 </para>
7280
7281<screen>VBoxManage guestcontrol &lt;uuid|vmname&gt; copyfrom [common-options]
7282 [--follow] [--R|recursive]
7283 --target-directory &lt;host-dst-dir&gt;
7284 &lt;guest-src0&gt; [&lt;guest-src1&gt; [...]] </screen>
7285
7286 <para>
7287 Where the parameters are as follows:
7288 </para>
7289
7290 <variablelist>
7291
7292 <varlistentry>
7293 <term>
7294 <computeroutput>&lt;uid|vmname&gt;</computeroutput>
7295 </term>
7296
7297 <listitem>
7298 <para>
7299 Specifies the VM UUID or VM name. Mandatory.
7300 </para>
7301 </listitem>
7302 </varlistentry>
7303
7304 <varlistentry>
7305 <term>
7306 <computeroutput>--follow</computeroutput>
7307 </term>
7308
7309 <listitem>
7310 <para>
7311 Enables symlink following on the guest file system.
7312 Optional.
7313 </para>
7314 </listitem>
7315 </varlistentry>
7316
7317 <varlistentry>
7318 <term>
7319 <computeroutput>-R|--recursive</computeroutput>
7320 </term>
7321
7322 <listitem>
7323 <para>
7324 Enables recursive copying of files and directories from
7325 the specified guest file system directory. Optional.
7326 </para>
7327 </listitem>
7328 </varlistentry>
7329
7330 <varlistentry>
7331 <term>
7332 <computeroutput>--target-directory
7333 &lt;host-dst-dir&gt;</computeroutput>
7334 </term>
7335
7336 <listitem>
7337 <para>
7338 Specifies the absolute path of the host file system
7339 destination directory. Mandatory. For example:
7340 <computeroutput>C:\Temp</computeroutput>.
7341 </para>
7342 </listitem>
7343 </varlistentry>
7344
7345 <varlistentry>
7346 <term>
7347 <computeroutput>&lt;guest-src0&gt; [&lt;guest-src1&gt;
7348 [...]]</computeroutput>
7349 </term>
7350
7351 <listitem>
7352 <para>
7353 Specifies the absolute paths of guest file system files
7354 to be copied. Mandatory. For example:
7355 <computeroutput>C:\Windows\System32\calc.exe</computeroutput>.
7356 Wildcards can be used in the expressions. For example:
7357 <computeroutput>C:\Windows\System*\*.dll</computeroutput>.
7358 </para>
7359 </listitem>
7360 </varlistentry>
7361
7362 </variablelist>
7363 </listitem>
7364
7365 <listitem>
7366 <para>
7367 <computeroutput>copyto</computeroutput>: Copies files from the
7368 host to the guest file system. Only available with Guest
7369 Additions 4.0 or later installed.
7370 </para>
7371
7372<screen>VBoxManage guestcontrol &lt;uuid|vmname&gt; copyto [common-options]
7373 [--follow] [--R|recursive]
7374 --target-directory &lt;guest-dst&gt;
7375 &lt;host-src0&gt; [&lt;host-src1&gt; [...]] </screen>
7376
7377 <para>
7378 Where the parameters are as follows:
7379 </para>
7380
7381 <variablelist>
7382
7383 <varlistentry>
7384 <term>
7385 <computeroutput>&lt;uuid|vmname&gt;</computeroutput>
7386 </term>
7387
7388 <listitem>
7389 <para>
7390 Specifies the VM UUID or VM name. Mandatory.
7391 </para>
7392 </listitem>
7393 </varlistentry>
7394
7395 <varlistentry>
7396 <term>
7397 <computeroutput>--follow</computeroutput>
7398 </term>
7399
7400 <listitem>
7401 <para>
7402 Enables symlink following on the host file system.
7403 Optional.
7404 </para>
7405 </listitem>
7406 </varlistentry>
7407
7408 <varlistentry>
7409 <term>
7410 <computeroutput>-R|--recursive</computeroutput>
7411 </term>
7412
7413 <listitem>
7414 <para>
7415 Enables recursive copying of files and directories from
7416 the specified host file system directory. Optional.
7417 </para>
7418 </listitem>
7419 </varlistentry>
7420
7421 <varlistentry>
7422 <term>
7423 <computeroutput>--target-directory
7424 &lt;guest-dst&gt;</computeroutput>
7425 </term>
7426
7427 <listitem>
7428 <para>
7429 Specifies the absolute path of the guest file system
7430 destination directory. Mandatory. For example:
7431 <computeroutput>C:\Temp</computeroutput>.
7432 </para>
7433 </listitem>
7434 </varlistentry>
7435
7436 <varlistentry>
7437 <term>
7438 <computeroutput>&lt;host-src0&gt; [&lt;host-src1&gt;
7439 [...]]</computeroutput>
7440 </term>
7441
7442 <listitem>
7443 <para>
7444 Specifies the absolute paths of host file system files
7445 to be copied. Mandatory. For example:
7446 <computeroutput>C:\Windows\System32\calc.exe</computeroutput>.
7447 Wildcards can be used in the expressions. For example:
7448 <computeroutput>C:\Windows\System*\*.dll</computeroutput>.
7449 </para>
7450 </listitem>
7451 </varlistentry>
7452
7453 </variablelist>
7454 </listitem>
7455
7456 <listitem>
7457 <para>
7458 <computeroutput>md|mkdir|createdir|createdirectory</computeroutput>:
7459 Creates one or more directories on the guest file system. Only
7460 available with Guest Additions 4.0 or later installed.
7461 </para>
7462
7463<screen>VBoxManage guestcontrol &lt;uuid|vmname&gt; md|mkdir|createdir|createdirectory [common-options]
7464 [--parents] [--mode &lt;mode&gt;]
7465 &lt;guest-dir0&gt; [&lt;guest-dir1&gt; [...]] </screen>
7466
7467 <para>
7468 Where the parameters are as follows:
7469 </para>
7470
7471 <variablelist>
7472
7473 <varlistentry>
7474 <term>
7475 <computeroutput>&lt;uuid|vmname&gt;</computeroutput>
7476 </term>
7477
7478 <listitem>
7479 <para>
7480 Specifies the VM UUID or VM name. Mandatory.
7481 </para>
7482 </listitem>
7483 </varlistentry>
7484
7485 <varlistentry>
7486 <term>
7487 <computeroutput>--parents</computeroutput>
7488 </term>
7489
7490 <listitem>
7491 <para>
7492 Creates any absent parent directories of the specified
7493 directory. Optional.
7494 </para>
7495
7496 <para>
7497 For example: If specified directory is
7498 <computeroutput>D:\Foo\Bar</computeroutput> and
7499 <computeroutput>D:\Foo</computeroutput> is absent, it
7500 will be created. In such a case, had the
7501 <computeroutput>--parents</computeroutput> option not
7502 been used, this command would have failed.
7503 </para>
7504 </listitem>
7505 </varlistentry>
7506
7507 <varlistentry>
7508 <term>
7509 <computeroutput>--mode &lt;mode&gt;</computeroutput>
7510 </term>
7511
7512 <listitem>
7513 <para>
7514 Specifies the permission mode on the specified
7515 directories, and any parents, if the
7516 <computeroutput>--parents</computeroutput> option is
7517 used. Currently octal modes only, such as.
7518 <computeroutput>0755</computeroutput>, are supported.
7519 </para>
7520 </listitem>
7521 </varlistentry>
7522
7523 <varlistentry>
7524 <term>
7525 <computeroutput>&lt;guest-dir0&gt; [&lt;guest-dir1&gt;
7526 [...]]</computeroutput>
7527 </term>
7528
7529 <listitem>
7530 <para>
7531 Specifies a list of absolute paths of directories to be
7532 created on guest file system. Mandatory. For example:
7533 <computeroutput>D:\Foo\Bar</computeroutput>.
7534 </para>
7535
7536 <para>
7537 All parent directories must already exist unless the
7538 switch <computeroutput>--parents</computeroutput> is
7539 used. For example, in the above example
7540 <computeroutput>D:\Foo</computeroutput>. The specified
7541 user must have sufficient rights to create the specified
7542 directories, and any parents that need to be created.
7543 </para>
7544 </listitem>
7545 </varlistentry>
7546
7547 </variablelist>
7548 </listitem>
7549
7550 <listitem>
7551 <para>
7552 <computeroutput>rmdir|removedir|removedirectory</computeroutput>:
7553 Deletes specified guest file system directories. Only
7554 available with installed Guest Additions 4.3.2 and later.
7555 </para>
7556
7557<screen>VBoxManage guestcontrol &lt;uuid|vmname&gt; rmdir|removedir|removedirectory [common-options]
7558 [--recursive|-R]
7559 &lt;guest-dir0&gt; [&lt;guest-dir1&gt; [...]]
7560 </screen>
7561
7562 <para>
7563 Where the parameters are as follows:
7564 </para>
7565
7566 <variablelist>
7567
7568 <varlistentry>
7569 <term>
7570 <computeroutput>&lt;uuid|vmname&gt;</computeroutput>
7571 </term>
7572
7573 <listitem>
7574 <para>
7575 Specifies the VM UUID or VM name. Mandatory.
7576 </para>
7577 </listitem>
7578 </varlistentry>
7579
7580 <varlistentry>
7581 <term>
7582 <computeroutput>--recursive</computeroutput>
7583 </term>
7584
7585 <listitem>
7586 <para>
7587 Recursively removes directories and contents. Optional.
7588 </para>
7589 </listitem>
7590 </varlistentry>
7591
7592 <varlistentry>
7593 <term>
7594 <computeroutput>&lt;guest-dir0&gt; [&lt;guest-dir1&gt;
7595 [...]]</computeroutput>
7596 </term>
7597
7598 <listitem>
7599 <para>
7600 Specifies a list of the absolute paths of directories to
7601 be deleted on guest file system. Mandatory. Wildcards
7602 are allowed. For example:
7603 <computeroutput>D:\Foo\*Bar</computeroutput>. The
7604 specified user must have sufficient rights to delete the
7605 specified directories.
7606 </para>
7607 </listitem>
7608 </varlistentry>
7609
7610 </variablelist>
7611 </listitem>
7612
7613 <listitem>
7614 <para>
7615 <computeroutput>rm|removefile</computeroutput>: Deletes
7616 specified files on the guest file system. Only available with
7617 installed Guest Additions 4.3.2 and later.
7618 </para>
7619
7620<screen>VBoxManage guestcontrol &lt;uuid|vmname&gt; rm|removefile [common-options]
7621 [-f|--force]
7622 &lt;guest-file0&gt; [&lt;guest-file1&gt; [...]] </screen>
7623
7624 <para>
7625 Where the parameters are as follows:
7626 </para>
7627
7628 <variablelist>
7629
7630 <varlistentry>
7631 <term>
7632 <computeroutput>&lt;uuid|vmname&gt;</computeroutput>
7633 </term>
7634
7635 <listitem>
7636 <para>
7637 Specifies the VM UUID or VM name. Mandatory.
7638 </para>
7639 </listitem>
7640 </varlistentry>
7641
7642 <varlistentry>
7643 <term>
7644 <computeroutput>-f|--force</computeroutput>
7645 </term>
7646
7647 <listitem>
7648 <para>
7649 Enforce operation and override any requests for
7650 confirmations. Optional.
7651 </para>
7652 </listitem>
7653 </varlistentry>
7654
7655 <varlistentry>
7656 <term>
7657 <computeroutput>&lt;guest-file0&gt; [&lt;guest-file1&gt;
7658 [...]]</computeroutput>
7659 </term>
7660
7661 <listitem>
7662 <para>
7663 Specifies a list of absolute paths of files to be
7664 deleted on guest file system. Mandatory. Wildcards are
7665 allowed. For example:
7666 <computeroutput>D:\Foo\Bar\text*.txt</computeroutput>.
7667 The specified user should have sufficient rights to
7668 delete the specified files.
7669 </para>
7670 </listitem>
7671 </varlistentry>
7672
7673 </variablelist>
7674 </listitem>
7675
7676 <listitem>
7677 <para>
7678 <computeroutput>mv|move|ren|rename</computeroutput>: Renames
7679 files and/or directories on the guest file system. Only
7680 available with installed Guest Additions 4.3.2 and later.
7681 </para>
7682
7683<screen>VBoxManage guestcontrol &lt;uuid|vmname&gt; mv|move|ren|rename [common-options]
7684 &lt;guest-source0&gt; [&lt;guest-source1&gt; [...]] &lt;guest-dest&gt;</screen>
7685
7686 <para>
7687 Where the parameters are as follows:
7688 </para>
7689
7690 <variablelist>
7691
7692 <varlistentry>
7693 <term>
7694 <computeroutput>&lt;uuid|vmname&gt;</computeroutput>
7695 </term>
7696
7697 <listitem>
7698 <para>
7699 Specifies the VM UUID or VM name. Mandatory.
7700 </para>
7701 </listitem>
7702 </varlistentry>
7703
7704 <varlistentry>
7705 <term>
7706 <computeroutput>&lt;guest-source0&gt;
7707 [&lt;guest-source1&gt; [...]]</computeroutput>
7708 </term>
7709
7710 <listitem>
7711 <para>
7712 Specifies absolute paths of files or a single directory
7713 to be moved and renamed on guest file system. Mandatory.
7714 Wildcards are allowed in file names. The specified user
7715 should have sufficient rights to access the specified
7716 files.
7717 </para>
7718 </listitem>
7719 </varlistentry>
7720
7721 <varlistentry>
7722 <term>
7723 <computeroutput>&lt;dest&gt;</computeroutput>
7724 </term>
7725
7726 <listitem>
7727 <para>
7728 Specifies the absolute path of the destination file or
7729 directory to which the files are to be moved. Mandatory.
7730 If only one file to be moved, &lt;dest&gt; can be file
7731 or directory, else it must be a directory. The specified
7732 user must have sufficient rights to access the
7733 destination file or directory.
7734 </para>
7735 </listitem>
7736 </varlistentry>
7737
7738 </variablelist>
7739 </listitem>
7740
7741 <listitem>
7742 <para>
7743 <computeroutput>mktemp|createtemp|createtemporary</computeroutput>:
7744 Creates a temporary file or directory on the guest file
7745 system, to assist subsequent copying of files from the host to
7746 the guest file systems. By default, the file or directory is
7747 created in the guest's platform specific temp directory. Not
7748 currently supported. Only available with installed Guest
7749 Additions 4.2 and later.
7750 </para>
7751
7752<screen>VBoxManage guestcontrol &lt;uuid|vmname&gt; mktemp|createtemp|createtemporary [common-options]
7753 [--directory] [--secure] [--mode &lt;mode&gt;] [--tmpdir &lt;directory&gt;]
7754 &lt;template&gt;
7755 </screen>
7756
7757 <para>
7758 The parameters are as follows:
7759 </para>
7760
7761 <variablelist>
7762
7763 <varlistentry>
7764 <term>
7765 <computeroutput>&lt;uuid|vmname&gt;</computeroutput>
7766 </term>
7767
7768 <listitem>
7769 <para>
7770 Specifies the VM UUID or VM name. Mandatory.
7771 </para>
7772 </listitem>
7773 </varlistentry>
7774
7775 <varlistentry>
7776 <term>
7777 <computeroutput>--directory</computeroutput>
7778 </term>
7779
7780 <listitem>
7781 <para>
7782 Creates a temporary directory instead of a file,
7783 specified by the &lt;template&gt; parameter. Optional.
7784 </para>
7785 </listitem>
7786 </varlistentry>
7787
7788 <varlistentry>
7789 <term>
7790 <computeroutput>--secure</computeroutput>
7791 </term>
7792
7793 <listitem>
7794 <para>
7795 Enforces secure file and directory creation. Optional.
7796 The permission mode is set to
7797 <computeroutput>0755</computeroutput>. Operation fails
7798 if it cannot be performed securely.
7799 </para>
7800 </listitem>
7801 </varlistentry>
7802
7803 <varlistentry>
7804 <term>
7805 <computeroutput>--mode &lt;mode&gt;</computeroutput>
7806 </term>
7807
7808 <listitem>
7809 <para>
7810 Specifies the permission mode of the specified
7811 directory. Optional. Currently only octal modes, such as
7812 <computeroutput>0755</computeroutput>, are supported.
7813 </para>
7814 </listitem>
7815 </varlistentry>
7816
7817 <varlistentry>
7818 <term>
7819 <computeroutput>--tmpdir
7820 &lt;directory&gt;</computeroutput>
7821 </term>
7822
7823 <listitem>
7824 <para>
7825 Specifies the absolute path of the directory on the
7826 guest file system where the file or directory specified
7827 will be created. Optional. If unspecified, the
7828 platform-specific temp directory is used.
7829 </para>
7830 </listitem>
7831 </varlistentry>
7832
7833 <varlistentry>
7834 <term>
7835 <computeroutput>&lt;template&gt;</computeroutput>
7836 </term>
7837
7838 <listitem>
7839 <para>
7840 Specifies a file name without a directory path,
7841 containing at least one sequence of three consecutive X
7842 characters, or ending in X. Mandatory.
7843 </para>
7844 </listitem>
7845 </varlistentry>
7846
7847 </variablelist>
7848 </listitem>
7849
7850 <listitem>
7851 <para>
7852 <computeroutput>stat</computeroutput>: Displays file or file
7853 system statuses on the guest.
7854 </para>
7855
7856<screen>VBoxManage guestcontrol &lt;uuid|vmname&gt; stat [common-options]
7857 &lt;file0&gt; [&lt;file1&gt; [...]]</screen>
7858
7859 <para>
7860 Where the parameters are as follows:
7861 </para>
7862
7863 <variablelist>
7864
7865 <varlistentry>
7866 <term>
7867 <computeroutput>&lt;uuid|vmname&gt;</computeroutput>
7868 </term>
7869
7870 <listitem>
7871 <para>
7872 Specifies the VM UUID or VM name. Mandatory.
7873 </para>
7874 </listitem>
7875 </varlistentry>
7876
7877 <varlistentry>
7878 <term>
7879 <computeroutput>&lt;file0&gt; [&lt;file1&gt;
7880 [...]]</computeroutput>
7881 </term>
7882
7883 <listitem>
7884 <para>
7885 Specifies absolute paths of files or file systems on the
7886 guest file system. Mandatory. For example:
7887 <computeroutput>/home/foo/a.out</computeroutput>. The
7888 specified user should have sufficient rights to access
7889 the specified files or file systems.
7890 </para>
7891 </listitem>
7892 </varlistentry>
7893
7894 </variablelist>
7895 </listitem>
7896
7897 </itemizedlist>
7898
7899 <para>
7900 The second set of subcommands is of the form:
7901 </para>
7902
7903<screen>VBoxManage guestcontrol &lt;uuid|vmname&gt; &lt;sub-command&gt;
7904 [-v|--verbose] [-q|quiet] ...
7905 </screen>
7906
7907 <para>
7908 The common options are as follows:
7909 </para>
7910
7911<screen>
7912 [-v|--verbose] [-q|--quiet]
7913 </screen>
7914
7915 <para>
7916 Details of the common options for the second set of subcommands
7917 are as follows:
7918 </para>
7919
7920 <variablelist>
7921
7922 <varlistentry>
7923 <term>
7924 <computeroutput>-v|--verbose</computeroutput>
7925 </term>
7926
7927 <listitem>
7928 <para>
7929 Makes the subcommand execution more verbose. Optional.
7930 </para>
7931 </listitem>
7932 </varlistentry>
7933
7934 <varlistentry>
7935 <term>
7936 <computeroutput>-q|--quiet</computeroutput>
7937 </term>
7938
7939 <listitem>
7940 <para>
7941 Makes the subcommand execution quieter. Optional.
7942 </para>
7943 </listitem>
7944 </varlistentry>
7945
7946 </variablelist>
7947
7948 <para>
7949 The second set of subcommands are as follows:
7950 </para>
7951
7952 <itemizedlist>
7953
7954 <listitem>
7955 <para>
7956 <computeroutput>list</computeroutput>: Lists guest control
7957 configuration and status data. For example: open guest
7958 sessions, guest processes, and files.
7959 </para>
7960
7961<screen>VBoxManage guestcontrol &lt;uuid|vmname&gt; list [common-opts]
7962 &lt;all|sessions|processes|files&gt; </screen>
7963
7964 <para>
7965 Where the parameters are as follows:
7966 </para>
7967
7968 <variablelist>
7969
7970 <varlistentry>
7971 <term>
7972 <computeroutput>&lt;uuid|vmname&gt;</computeroutput>
7973 </term>
7974
7975 <listitem>
7976 <para>
7977 Specifies the VM UUID or VM name. Mandatory.
7978 </para>
7979 </listitem>
7980 </varlistentry>
7981
7982 <varlistentry>
7983 <term>
7984 <computeroutput>all|sessions|processes|files</computeroutput>
7985 </term>
7986
7987 <listitem>
7988 <para>
7989 Indicates whether to list all available data or guest
7990 sessions, processes or files. Mandatory.
7991 </para>
7992 </listitem>
7993 </varlistentry>
7994
7995 </variablelist>
7996 </listitem>
7997
7998 <listitem>
7999 <para>
8000 <computeroutput>closeprocess</computeroutput>: Terminates
8001 guest processes specified by PIDs running in a guest session,
8002 specified by the session ID or name.
8003 </para>
8004
8005<screen>VBoxManage guestcontrol &lt;uuid|vmname&gt; closeprocess [common-options]
8006 --session-id &lt;ID&gt; | --session-name &lt;name or pattern&gt;
8007 &lt;PID0&gt; [&lt;PID1&gt; [...]] </screen>
8008
8009 <para>
8010 Where the parameters are as follows:
8011 </para>
8012
8013 <variablelist>
8014
8015 <varlistentry>
8016 <term>
8017 <computeroutput>&lt;uuid|vmname&gt;</computeroutput>
8018 </term>
8019
8020 <listitem>
8021 <para>
8022 Specifies the VM UUID or VM name. Mandatory.
8023 </para>
8024 </listitem>
8025 </varlistentry>
8026
8027 <varlistentry>
8028 <term>
8029 <computeroutput>--session-id &lt;ID&gt;</computeroutput>
8030 </term>
8031
8032 <listitem>
8033 <para>
8034 Specifies the guest session by its ID. Optional.
8035 </para>
8036 </listitem>
8037 </varlistentry>
8038
8039 <varlistentry>
8040 <term>
8041 <computeroutput>--session-name &lt;name or
8042 pattern&gt;</computeroutput>
8043 </term>
8044
8045 <listitem>
8046 <para>
8047 Specifies the guest session by its name, or multiple
8048 sessions using a pattern containing wildcards. Optional.
8049 </para>
8050 </listitem>
8051 </varlistentry>
8052
8053 <varlistentry>
8054 <term>
8055 <computeroutput>&lt;PID0&gt; [&lt;PID1&gt;
8056 [...]]</computeroutput>
8057 </term>
8058
8059 <listitem>
8060 <para>
8061 Specifies a list of process identifiers (PIDs) of guest
8062 processes to be terminated. Mandatory.
8063 </para>
8064 </listitem>
8065 </varlistentry>
8066
8067 </variablelist>
8068 </listitem>
8069
8070 <listitem>
8071 <para>
8072 <computeroutput>closesession</computeroutput>: Closes
8073 specified guest sessions, specified either by session ID or
8074 name.
8075 </para>
8076
8077<screen>VBoxManage guestcontrol &lt;uuid|vmname&gt; closesession [common-options]
8078 --session-id &lt;ID&gt; | --session-name &lt;name or pattern&gt; | --all </screen>
8079
8080 <para>
8081 Where the parameters are as follows:
8082 </para>
8083
8084 <variablelist>
8085
8086 <varlistentry>
8087 <term>
8088 <computeroutput>&lt;uuid|vmname&gt;</computeroutput>
8089 </term>
8090
8091 <listitem>
8092 <para>
8093 Specifies the VM UUID or VM name. Mandatory.
8094 </para>
8095 </listitem>
8096 </varlistentry>
8097
8098 <varlistentry>
8099 <term>
8100 <computeroutput>--session-id &lt;ID&gt;</computeroutput>
8101 </term>
8102
8103 <listitem>
8104 <para>
8105 Specifies the guest session to be closed by ID.
8106 Optional.
8107 </para>
8108 </listitem>
8109 </varlistentry>
8110
8111 <varlistentry>
8112 <term>
8113 <computeroutput>--session-name &lt;name or
8114 pattern&gt;</computeroutput>
8115 </term>
8116
8117 <listitem>
8118 <para>
8119 Specifies the guest session to be closed by name.
8120 Optional. Multiple sessions can be specified by using a
8121 pattern containing wildcards.
8122 </para>
8123 </listitem>
8124 </varlistentry>
8125
8126 <varlistentry>
8127 <term>
8128 <computeroutput>--all</computeroutput>
8129 </term>
8130
8131 <listitem>
8132 <para>
8133 Close all guest sessions. Optional.
8134 </para>
8135 </listitem>
8136 </varlistentry>
8137
8138 </variablelist>
8139 </listitem>
8140
8141 <listitem>
8142 <para>
8143 <computeroutput>updatega|updateadditions|updateguestadditions</computeroutput>:
8144 Ugrades Guest Additions already installed on the guest. Only
8145 available for already installed Guest Additions 4.0 and later.
8146 </para>
8147
8148<screen>VBoxManage guestcontrol &lt;uuid|vmname&gt; updatega|updateadditions|updateguestadditions
8149 [common-options]
8150 [--source &lt;New .ISO path&gt;]
8151 [--wait-start]
8152 [-- &lt;argument0&gt; [&lt;argument1&gt; [...]]]</screen>
8153
8154 <para>
8155 Where the parameters are as follows:
8156 </para>
8157
8158 <variablelist>
8159
8160 <varlistentry>
8161 <term>
8162 <computeroutput>&lt;uuid|vmname&gt;</computeroutput>
8163 </term>
8164
8165 <listitem>
8166 <para>
8167 Specifies the VM UUID or VM name. Mandatory.
8168 </para>
8169 </listitem>
8170 </varlistentry>
8171
8172 <varlistentry>
8173 <term>
8174 <computeroutput>--source</computeroutput> &lt;New .ISO
8175 path&gt;
8176 </term>
8177
8178 <listitem>
8179 <para>
8180 Specifies the absolute path on the guest file system of
8181 the .ISO file for the Guest Additions update. Mandatory.
8182 </para>
8183 </listitem>
8184 </varlistentry>
8185
8186 <varlistentry>
8187 <term>
8188 <computeroutput>--wait-start</computeroutput>
8189 </term>
8190
8191 <listitem>
8192 <para>
8193 Indicates that <command>VBoxManage</command> starts the
8194 usual updating process on the guest and then waits until
8195 the actual Guest Additions updating begins, at which
8196 point <command>VBoxManage</command> self-terminates.
8197 Optional.
8198 </para>
8199
8200 <para>
8201 Default behavior is that <command>VBoxManage</command>
8202 waits for completion of the Guest Additions update
8203 before terminating. Use of this option is sometimes
8204 necessary, as a running <command>VBoxManage</command>
8205 can affect the interaction between the installer and the
8206 guest OS.
8207 </para>
8208 </listitem>
8209 </varlistentry>
8210
8211 <varlistentry>
8212 <term>
8213 <computeroutput>[-- &lt;argument0&gt; [&lt;argument1&gt;
8214 [...]]]</computeroutput>
8215 </term>
8216
8217 <listitem>
8218 <para>
8219 Specifies optional command line arguments to be supplied
8220 to the Guest Additions updater. Useful for retrofitting
8221 features which are not currently installed.
8222 </para>
8223
8224 <para>
8225 Arguments containing spaces should be enclosed by
8226 quotes.
8227 </para>
8228 </listitem>
8229 </varlistentry>
8230
8231 </variablelist>
8232 </listitem>
8233
8234 <listitem>
8235 <para>
8236 <computeroutput>watch</computeroutput>: Prints current guest
8237 control activity.
8238 </para>
8239
8240<screen>VBoxManage guestcontrol &lt;uuid|vmname&gt; watch [common-options]
8241 </screen>
8242
8243 <para>
8244 Where the parameters are as follows:
8245 </para>
8246
8247 <variablelist>
8248
8249 <varlistentry>
8250 <term>
8251 <computeroutput>&lt;uuid|vmname&gt;</computeroutput>
8252 </term>
8253
8254 <listitem>
8255 <para>
8256 Specifies the VM UUID or VM name. Mandatory.
8257 </para>
8258 </listitem>
8259 </varlistentry>
8260
8261 </variablelist>
8262 </listitem>
8263
8264 </itemizedlist>
8265
8266 </sect1>
8267
8268 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-metrics">
8269
8270 <title>VBoxManage metrics</title>
8271
8272 <para>
8273 This command supports monitoring the usage of system resources.
8274 Resources are represented by various metrics associated with the
8275 host system or a particular VM. For example, the host system has a
8276 <computeroutput>CPU/Load/User</computeroutput> metric that shows
8277 the percentage of time CPUs spend executing in user mode over a
8278 specific sampling period.
8279 </para>
8280
8281 <para>
8282 Metric data is collected and retained internally. It may be
8283 retrieved at any time with the <command>VBoxManage metrics
8284 query</command> subcommand. The data is available as long as the
8285 background <computeroutput>VBoxSVC</computeroutput> process is
8286 alive. That process terminates shortly after all VMs and frontends
8287 have been closed.
8288 </para>
8289
8290 <para>
8291 By default no metrics are collected at all. Metrics collection
8292 does not start until <command>VBoxManage metrics setup</command>
8293 is invoked with a proper sampling interval and the number of
8294 metrics to be retained. The interval is measured in seconds. For
8295 example, to enable collecting the host processor and memory usage
8296 metrics every second and keeping the five most current samples,
8297 the following command can be used:
8298 </para>
8299
8300<screen>VBoxManage metrics setup --period 1 --samples 5 host CPU/Load,RAM/Usage</screen>
8301
8302 <para>
8303 Metric collection can only be enabled for started VMs. Collected
8304 data and collection settings for a particular VM will disappear as
8305 soon as it shuts down. Use the <command>VBoxManage metrics
8306 list</command> subcommand to see which metrics are currently
8307 available. You can also use the <option>--list</option> option
8308 with any subcommand that modifies metric settings to find out
8309 which metrics were affected.
8310 </para>
8311
8312 <para>
8313 Note that the <command>VBoxManage metrics setup</command>
8314 subcommand discards all samples that may have been previously
8315 collected for the specified set of objects and metrics.
8316 </para>
8317
8318 <para>
8319 To enable or disable metrics collection without discarding the
8320 data, <command>VBoxManage metrics enable</command> and
8321 <command>VBoxManage metrics disable</command> subcommands can be
8322 used. Note that these subcommands expect metrics as parameters,
8323 not submetrics such as <computeroutput>CPU/Load</computeroutput>
8324 or <computeroutput>RAM/Usage</computeroutput>. In other words
8325 enabling <computeroutput>CPU/Load/User</computeroutput> while
8326 disabling <computeroutput>CPU/Load/Kernel</computeroutput> is not
8327 supported.
8328 </para>
8329
8330 <para>
8331 The host and VMs have different sets of associated metrics.
8332 Available metrics can be listed with <command>VBoxManage metrics
8333 list</command> subcommand.
8334 </para>
8335
8336 <para>
8337 A complete metric name may include an aggregate function. The name
8338 has the following form:
8339 <computeroutput>Category/Metric[/SubMetric][:aggregate]</computeroutput>.
8340 For example, <computeroutput>RAM/Usage/Free:min</computeroutput>
8341 stands for the minimum amount of available memory over all
8342 retained data if applied to the host object.
8343 </para>
8344
8345 <para>
8346 Subcommands may apply to all objects and metrics or can be limited
8347 to one object and a list of metrics. If no objects or metrics are
8348 given in the parameters, the subcommands will apply to all
8349 available metrics of all objects. You may use an asterisk
8350 "<computeroutput>*</computeroutput>" to explicitly specify that
8351 the command should be applied to all objects or metrics. Use
8352 <computeroutput>host</computeroutput> as the object name to limit
8353 the scope of the command to host-related metrics. To limit the
8354 scope to a subset of metrics, use a metric list with names
8355 separated by commas.
8356 </para>
8357
8358 <para>
8359 For example, to query metric data on the CPU time spent in user
8360 and kernel modes by the virtual machine named
8361 <computeroutput>test</computeroutput>, use the following command:
8362 </para>
8363
8364<screen>VBoxManage metrics query test CPU/Load/User,CPU/Load/Kernel</screen>
8365
8366 <para>
8367 The following list summarizes the available subcommands:
8368 </para>
8369
8370 <variablelist>
8371
8372 <varlistentry>
8373 <term>
8374 <computeroutput>list</computeroutput>
8375 </term>
8376
8377 <listitem>
8378 <para>
8379 Shows the parameters of the currently existing metrics. Note
8380 that VM-specific metrics are only available when a
8381 particular VM is running.
8382 </para>
8383 </listitem>
8384 </varlistentry>
8385
8386 <varlistentry>
8387 <term>
8388 <computeroutput>setup</computeroutput>
8389 </term>
8390
8391 <listitem>
8392 <para>
8393 Sets the interval between taking two samples of metric data
8394 and the number of samples retained internally. The retained
8395 data is available for displaying with the
8396 <command>query</command> subcommand. The
8397 <computeroutput>--list</computeroutput> option shows which
8398 metrics have been modified as the result of the command
8399 execution.
8400 </para>
8401 </listitem>
8402 </varlistentry>
8403
8404 <varlistentry>
8405 <term>
8406 <computeroutput>enable</computeroutput>
8407 </term>
8408
8409 <listitem>
8410 <para>
8411 Resumes data collection after it has been stopped with the
8412 <command>disable</command> subcommand. Note that specifying
8413 submetrics as parameters will not enable underlying metrics.
8414 Use <computeroutput>--list</computeroutput> to find out if
8415 the command worked as expected.
8416 </para>
8417 </listitem>
8418 </varlistentry>
8419
8420 <varlistentry>
8421 <term>
8422 <computeroutput>disable</computeroutput>
8423 </term>
8424
8425 <listitem>
8426 <para>
8427 Suspends data collection without affecting collection
8428 parameters or collected data. Note that specifying
8429 submetrics as parameters will not disable underlying
8430 metrics. Use <computeroutput>--list</computeroutput> to find
8431 out if the command worked as expected.
8432 </para>
8433 </listitem>
8434 </varlistentry>
8435
8436 <varlistentry>
8437 <term>
8438 <computeroutput>query</computeroutput>
8439 </term>
8440
8441 <listitem>
8442 <para>
8443 Retrieves and displays the currently retained metric data.
8444 </para>
8445
8446 <note>
8447 <para>
8448 The <command>query</command> subcommand does not remove or
8449 flush retained data. If you query often enough you will
8450 see how old samples are gradually being phased out by new
8451 samples.
8452 </para>
8453 </note>
8454 </listitem>
8455 </varlistentry>
8456
8457 <varlistentry>
8458 <term>
8459 <computeroutput>collect</computeroutput>
8460 </term>
8461
8462 <listitem>
8463 <para>
8464 Sets the interval between taking two samples of metric data
8465 and the number of samples retained internally. The collected
8466 data is displayed periodically until Ctrl+C is pressed,
8467 unless the <computeroutput>--detach</computeroutput> option
8468 is specified. With the
8469 <computeroutput>--detach</computeroutput> option, this
8470 subcommand operates the same way as
8471 <computeroutput>setup</computeroutput> does. The
8472 <computeroutput>--list</computeroutput> option shows which
8473 metrics match the specified filter.
8474 </para>
8475 </listitem>
8476 </varlistentry>
8477
8478 </variablelist>
8479
8480 </sect1>
8481
8482 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-natnetwork">
8483
8484 <title>VBoxManage natnetwork</title>
8485
8486 <para>
8487 NAT networks use the Network Address Translation (NAT) service,
8488 which works in a similar way to a home router. It groups systems
8489 using it into a network and prevents outside systems from directly
8490 accessing those inside, while letting systems inside communicate
8491 with each other and outside systems using TCP and UDP over IPv4
8492 and IPv6.
8493 </para>
8494
8495 <para>
8496 A NAT service is attached to an internal network. Virtual machines
8497 to make use of one should be attached to it. The name of an
8498 internal network is chosen when the NAT service is created, and
8499 the internal network will be created if it does not already exist.
8500 The following is an example command to create a NAT network:
8501 </para>
8502
8503<screen>VBoxManage natnetwork add --netname natnet1 --network "192.168.15.0/24" --enable</screen>
8504
8505 <para>
8506 Here, <computeroutput>natnet1</computeroutput> is the name of the
8507 internal network to be used and
8508 <computeroutput>192.168.15.0/24</computeroutput> is the network
8509 address and mask of the NAT service interface. By default, in this
8510 static configuration the gateway will be assigned the address
8511 192.168.15.1, the address after the interface address, though this
8512 is subject to change.
8513 </para>
8514
8515 <para>
8516 To add a DHCP server to the NAT network after creation, run the
8517 following command:
8518 </para>
8519
8520<screen>VBoxManage natnetwork modify --netname natnet1 --dhcp on</screen>
8521
8522 <para>
8523 The subcommands for <command>VBoxManage natnetwork</command> are
8524 as follows:
8525 </para>
8526
8527<screen>VBoxManage natnetwork add --netname &lt;name&gt;
8528 [--network &lt;network&gt;]
8529 [--enable|--disable]
8530 [--dhcp on|off]
8531 [--port-forward-4 &lt;rule&gt;]
8532 [--loopback-4 &lt;rule&gt;]
8533 [--ipv6 on|off]
8534 [--port-forward-6 &lt;rule&gt;]
8535 [--loopback-6 &lt;rule&gt;]
8536 </screen>
8537
8538 <para>
8539 <command>VBoxManage natnetwork add</command>: Creates a new
8540 internal network interface, and adds a NAT network service. This
8541 command is a prerequisite for enabling attachment of VMs to the
8542 NAT network. Parameters are as follows:
8543 </para>
8544
8545 <variablelist>
8546
8547 <varlistentry>
8548 <term>
8549 <computeroutput>--netname &lt;name&gt;</computeroutput>
8550 </term>
8551
8552 <listitem>
8553 <para>
8554 Where &lt;name&gt; is the name of the new internal network
8555 interface on the host OS.
8556 </para>
8557 </listitem>
8558 </varlistentry>
8559
8560 <varlistentry>
8561 <term>
8562 <computeroutput>--network &lt;network&gt;</computeroutput>
8563 </term>
8564
8565 <listitem>
8566 <para>
8567 Where &lt;network&gt; specifies the static or DHCP network
8568 address and mask of the NAT service interface. The default
8569 is a static network address.
8570 </para>
8571 </listitem>
8572 </varlistentry>
8573
8574 <varlistentry>
8575 <term>
8576 <computeroutput>--enable|--disable</computeroutput>
8577 </term>
8578
8579 <listitem>
8580 <para>
8581 Enables and disables the NAT network service.
8582 </para>
8583 </listitem>
8584 </varlistentry>
8585
8586 <varlistentry>
8587 <term>
8588 <computeroutput>--dhcp on|off</computeroutput>
8589 </term>
8590
8591 <listitem>
8592 <para>
8593 Enables and disables a DHCP server specified by
8594 <computeroutput>--netname</computeroutput>. Use of this
8595 option also indicates that it is a DHCP server.
8596 </para>
8597 </listitem>
8598 </varlistentry>
8599
8600 <varlistentry>
8601 <term>
8602 <computeroutput>--port-forward-4 &lt;rule&gt;</computeroutput>
8603 </term>
8604
8605 <listitem>
8606 <para>
8607 Enables IPv4 port forwarding, with a rule specified by
8608 &lt;rule&gt;.
8609 </para>
8610 </listitem>
8611 </varlistentry>
8612
8613 <varlistentry>
8614 <term>
8615 <computeroutput>--loopback-4 &lt;rule&gt;</computeroutput>
8616 </term>
8617
8618 <listitem>
8619 <para>
8620 Enables the IPv4 loopback interface, with a rule specified
8621 by &lt;rule&gt;.
8622 </para>
8623 </listitem>
8624 </varlistentry>
8625
8626 <varlistentry>
8627 <term>
8628 <computeroutput>--ipv6 on|off</computeroutput>
8629 </term>
8630
8631 <listitem>
8632 <para>
8633 Enables and disables IPv6. The default setting is IPv4,
8634 disabling IPv6 enables IPv4.
8635 </para>
8636 </listitem>
8637 </varlistentry>
8638
8639 <varlistentry>
8640 <term>
8641 <computeroutput>--port-forward-6 &lt;rule&gt;</computeroutput>
8642 </term>
8643
8644 <listitem>
8645 <para>
8646 Enables IPv6 port forwarding, with a rule specified by
8647 &lt;rule&gt;.
8648 </para>
8649 </listitem>
8650 </varlistentry>
8651
8652 <varlistentry>
8653 <term>
8654 <computeroutput>--loopback-6 &lt;rule&gt;</computeroutput>
8655 </term>
8656
8657 <listitem>
8658 <para>
8659 Enables the IPv6 loopback interface, with a rule specified
8660 by &lt;rule&gt;.
8661 </para>
8662 </listitem>
8663 </varlistentry>
8664
8665 </variablelist>
8666
8667<screen>VBoxManage natnetwork remove --netname &lt;name&gt; </screen>
8668
8669 <para>
8670 <command>VBoxManage natnetwork remove</command>: Removes a NAT
8671 network service. Parameters are as follows:
8672 </para>
8673
8674 <variablelist>
8675
8676 <varlistentry>
8677 <term>
8678 <computeroutput>--netname &lt;name&gt;</computeroutput>
8679 </term>
8680
8681 <listitem>
8682 <para>
8683 Where &lt;name&gt; specifies an existing NAT network
8684 service. Does not remove any DHCP server enabled on the
8685 network.
8686 </para>
8687 </listitem>
8688 </varlistentry>
8689
8690 </variablelist>
8691
8692<screen>VBoxManage natnetwork modify --netname &lt;name&gt;
8693 [--network &lt;network&gt;]
8694 [--enable|--disable]
8695 [--dhcp on|off]
8696 [--port-forward-4 &lt;rule&gt;]
8697 [--loopback-4 &lt;rule&gt;]
8698 [--ipv6 on|off]
8699 [--port-forward-6 &lt;rule&gt;]
8700 [--loopback-6 &lt;rule&gt;]
8701 </screen>
8702
8703 <para>
8704 <command>VBoxManage natnetwork modify</command>: Modifies an
8705 existing NAT network service. Parameters are as follows:
8706 </para>
8707
8708 <variablelist>
8709
8710 <varlistentry>
8711 <term>
8712 <computeroutput>--netname &lt;name&gt;</computeroutput>
8713 </term>
8714
8715 <listitem>
8716 <para>
8717 Where &lt;name&gt; specifies an existing NAT network
8718 service.
8719 </para>
8720 </listitem>
8721 </varlistentry>
8722
8723 <varlistentry>
8724 <term>
8725 <computeroutput>--network &lt;network&gt;</computeroutput>
8726 </term>
8727
8728 <listitem>
8729 <para>
8730 Where &lt;network&gt; specifies the new static or DHCP
8731 network address and mask of the NAT service interface. The
8732 default is a static network address.
8733 </para>
8734 </listitem>
8735 </varlistentry>
8736
8737 <varlistentry>
8738 <term>
8739 <computeroutput>--enable|--disable</computeroutput>
8740 </term>
8741
8742 <listitem>
8743 <para>
8744 Enables and disables the NAT network service.
8745 </para>
8746 </listitem>
8747 </varlistentry>
8748
8749 <varlistentry>
8750 <term>
8751 <computeroutput>--dhcp on|off</computeroutput>
8752 </term>
8753
8754 <listitem>
8755 <para>
8756 Enables and disables a DHCP server. If a DHCP server is not
8757 present, using enable adds a new DHCP server.
8758 </para>
8759 </listitem>
8760 </varlistentry>
8761
8762 <varlistentry>
8763 <term>
8764 <computeroutput>--port-forward-4 &lt;rule&gt;</computeroutput>
8765 </term>
8766
8767 <listitem>
8768 <para>
8769 Enables IPv4 port forwarding, with a rule specified by
8770 &lt;rule&gt;.
8771 </para>
8772 </listitem>
8773 </varlistentry>
8774
8775 <varlistentry>
8776 <term>
8777 <computeroutput>--loopback-4 &lt;rule&gt;</computeroutput>
8778 </term>
8779
8780 <listitem>
8781 <para>
8782 Enables the IPv4 loopback interface, with a rule specified
8783 by &lt;rule&gt;.
8784 </para>
8785 </listitem>
8786 </varlistentry>
8787
8788 <varlistentry>
8789 <term>
8790 <computeroutput>--ipv6 on|off</computeroutput>
8791 </term>
8792
8793 <listitem>
8794 <para>
8795 Enables and disables IPv6. The default setting is IPv4,
8796 disabling IPv6 enables IPv4.
8797 </para>
8798 </listitem>
8799 </varlistentry>
8800
8801 <varlistentry>
8802 <term>
8803 <computeroutput>--port-forward-6 &lt;rule&gt;</computeroutput>
8804 </term>
8805
8806 <listitem>
8807 <para>
8808 Enables IPv6 port forwarding, with a rule specified by
8809 &lt;rule&gt;.
8810 </para>
8811 </listitem>
8812 </varlistentry>
8813
8814 <varlistentry>
8815 <term>
8816 <computeroutput>--loopback-6 &lt;rule&gt;</computeroutput>
8817 </term>
8818
8819 <listitem>
8820 <para>
8821 Enables IPv6 loopback interface, with a rule specified by
8822 &lt;rule&gt;.
8823 </para>
8824 </listitem>
8825 </varlistentry>
8826
8827 </variablelist>
8828
8829<screen>VBoxManage natnetwork start --netname &lt;name&gt;
8830 </screen>
8831
8832 <para>
8833 <command>VBoxManage natnetwork start</command>: Starts the
8834 specified NAT network service and any associated DHCP server.
8835 Parameters are as follows:
8836 </para>
8837
8838 <variablelist>
8839
8840 <varlistentry>
8841 <term>
8842 <computeroutput>--netname &lt;name&gt;</computeroutput>
8843 </term>
8844
8845 <listitem>
8846 <para>
8847 Where &lt;name&gt; specifies an existing NAT network
8848 service.
8849 </para>
8850 </listitem>
8851 </varlistentry>
8852
8853 </variablelist>
8854
8855<screen>VBoxManage natnetwork stop --netname &lt;name&gt;
8856 </screen>
8857
8858 <para>
8859 <command>VBoxManage natnetwork stop</command>: Stops the specified
8860 NAT network service and any DHCP server. Parameters are as
8861 follows:
8862 </para>
8863
8864 <variablelist>
8865
8866 <varlistentry>
8867 <term>
8868 <computeroutput>--netname &lt;name&gt;</computeroutput>
8869 </term>
8870
8871 <listitem>
8872 <para>
8873 Where &lt;name&gt; specifies an existing NAT network
8874 service.
8875 </para>
8876 </listitem>
8877 </varlistentry>
8878
8879 </variablelist>
8880
8881<screen>VBoxManage natnetwork list [&lt;pattern&gt;] </screen>
8882
8883 <para>
8884 <command>VBoxManage natnetwork list</command>: Lists all NAT
8885 network services, with optional filtering. Parameters are as
8886 follows:
8887 </para>
8888
8889 <variablelist>
8890
8891 <varlistentry>
8892 <term>
8893 <computeroutput>[&lt;pattern&gt;]</computeroutput>
8894 </term>
8895
8896 <listitem>
8897 <para>
8898 Where &lt;pattern&gt; is an optional filtering pattern.
8899 </para>
8900 </listitem>
8901 </varlistentry>
8902
8903 </variablelist>
8904
8905 </sect1>
8906
8907 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-hostonlyif">
8908
8909 <title>VBoxManage hostonlyif</title>
8910
8911 <para>
8912 The <command>hostonlyif</command> command enables you to change
8913 the IP configuration of a host-only network interface. For a
8914 description of host-only networking, see
8915 <xref linkend="network_hostonly" />. Each host-only interface is
8916 identified by a name and can either use the internal DHCP server
8917 or a manual IP configuration, both IP4 and IP6.
8918 </para>
8919
8920 <para>
8921 The following list summarizes the available subcommands:
8922 </para>
8923
8924 <variablelist>
8925
8926 <varlistentry>
8927 <term>
8928 <computeroutput>ipconfig "&lt;name&gt;"</computeroutput>
8929 </term>
8930
8931 <listitem>
8932 <para>
8933 Configures a host-only interface.
8934 </para>
8935 </listitem>
8936 </varlistentry>
8937
8938 <varlistentry>
8939 <term>
8940 <computeroutput>create</computeroutput>
8941 </term>
8942
8943 <listitem>
8944 <para>
8945 Creates a new vboxnet&lt;N&gt; interface on the host OS.
8946 This command is essential before you can attach VMs to a
8947 host-only network.
8948 </para>
8949 </listitem>
8950 </varlistentry>
8951
8952 <varlistentry>
8953 <term>
8954 <computeroutput>remove vboxnet&lt;N&gt;</computeroutput>
8955 </term>
8956
8957 <listitem>
8958 <para>
8959 Removes a vboxnet&lt;N&gt; interface from the host OS.
8960 </para>
8961 </listitem>
8962 </varlistentry>
8963
8964 </variablelist>
8965
8966 </sect1>
8967
8968 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-dhcpserver">
8969
8970 <title>VBoxManage dhcpserver</title>
8971
8972 <para>
8973 The <command>dhcpserver</command> commands enable you to control
8974 the DHCP server that is built into &product-name;. You may find
8975 this useful when using internal or host-only networking.
8976 Theoretically, you can also enable it for a bridged network, but
8977 that may cause conflicts with other DHCP servers in your physical
8978 network.
8979 </para>
8980
8981 <para>
8982 Use the following command line options:
8983 </para>
8984
8985 <itemizedlist>
8986
8987 <listitem>
8988 <para>
8989 If you use internal networking for a virtual network adapter
8990 of a virtual machine, use <computeroutput>VBoxManage
8991 dhcpserver add --netname
8992 &lt;network_name&gt;</computeroutput>, where
8993 <computeroutput>&lt;network_name&gt;</computeroutput> is the
8994 same network name you used with <computeroutput>VBoxManage
8995 modifyvm &lt;vmname&gt; --intnet&lt;X&gt;
8996 &lt;network_name&gt;</computeroutput>.
8997 </para>
8998 </listitem>
8999
9000 <listitem>
9001 <para>
9002 If you use host-only networking for a virtual network adapter
9003 of a virtual machine, use <computeroutput>VBoxManage
9004 dhcpserver add --ifname
9005 &lt;hostonly_if_name&gt;</computeroutput> instead, where
9006 <computeroutput>&lt;hostonly_if_name&gt;</computeroutput> is
9007 the same host-only interface name you used with
9008 <computeroutput>VBoxManage modifyvm &lt;vmname&gt;
9009 --hostonlyadapter&lt;X&gt;
9010 &lt;hostonly_if_name&gt;</computeroutput>.
9011 </para>
9012
9013 <para>
9014 Alternatively, you can also use the <option>--netname</option>
9015 option as with internal networks if you know the host-only
9016 network's name. You can see the names with <command>VBoxManage
9017 list hostonlyifs</command>. See
9018 <xref linkend="vboxmanage-list" />.
9019 </para>
9020 </listitem>
9021
9022 </itemizedlist>
9023
9024 <para>
9025 The following additional parameters are required when first adding
9026 a DHCP server:
9027 </para>
9028
9029 <itemizedlist>
9030
9031 <listitem>
9032 <para>
9033 With <computeroutput>--ip</computeroutput>, specify the IP
9034 address of the DHCP server.
9035 </para>
9036 </listitem>
9037
9038 <listitem>
9039 <para>
9040 With <computeroutput>--netmask</computeroutput>, specify the
9041 netmask of the network.
9042 </para>
9043 </listitem>
9044
9045 <listitem>
9046 <para>
9047 With <computeroutput>--lowerip</computeroutput> and
9048 <computeroutput>--upperip</computeroutput>, you can specify
9049 the lowest and highest IP address that the DHCP server will
9050 assign to clients.
9051 </para>
9052 </listitem>
9053
9054 </itemizedlist>
9055
9056 <para>
9057 You can specify additional DHCP options with the
9058 <computeroutput>--options</computeroutput> command option. Use
9059 <computeroutput>--id</computeroutput> and
9060 <computeroutput>--value</computeroutput> to configure a number and
9061 string pair corresponding to the DHCP option. Use
9062 <computeroutput>--remove</computeroutput> to remove a DHCP option.
9063 </para>
9064
9065 <para>
9066 The <computeroutput>--vm</computeroutput> and
9067 <computeroutput>--nic</computeroutput> settings enable you to
9068 configure DHCP options for a specific network adapter used by the
9069 named VM.
9070 </para>
9071
9072 <para>
9073 Finally, you must specify
9074 <computeroutput>--enable</computeroutput> or the DHCP server will
9075 be created in the disabled state and will not be running.
9076 </para>
9077
9078 <para>
9079 After this, &product-name; will automatically start the DHCP
9080 server for the specified internal network or host-only network as
9081 soon as the first virtual machine which uses that network is
9082 started.
9083 </para>
9084
9085 <para>
9086 Use <command>VBoxManage dhcpserver remove</command> with the given
9087 <computeroutput>--netname &lt;network_name&gt;</computeroutput> or
9088 <computeroutput>--ifname &lt;hostonly_if_name&gt;</computeroutput>
9089 to remove the DHCP server for the specified internal network or
9090 host-only network.
9091 </para>
9092
9093 <para>
9094 To modify the settings of a DHCP server created using
9095 <command>VBoxManage dhcpserver add</command>, you can use
9096 <command>VBoxManage dhcpserver modify</command> for a given
9097 network or host-only interface name. This has the same parameters
9098 as <command>VBoxManage dhcpserver add</command>.
9099 </para>
9100
9101 </sect1>
9102
9103 <sect1 id="vboxmanage-usbdevsource">
9104
9105 <title>VBoxManage usbdevsource</title>
9106
9107 <para>
9108 The <command>usbdevsource</command> commands enable you to add and
9109 remove USB devices globally.
9110 </para>
9111
9112 <para>
9113 The following command adds a USB device.
9114 </para>
9115
9116<screen>VBoxManage usbdevsource add &lt;source name&gt;
9117 --backend &lt;backend&gt;
9118 --address &lt;address&gt;
9119 </screen>
9120
9121 <para>
9122 Where the command line options are as follows:
9123 </para>
9124
9125 <itemizedlist>
9126
9127 <listitem>
9128 <para>
9129 <computeroutput>&lt;source name&gt;</computeroutput>:
9130 Specifies the ID of the source USB device to be added.
9131 Mandatory.
9132 </para>
9133 </listitem>
9134
9135 <listitem>
9136 <para>
9137 <computeroutput>--backend &lt;backend&gt;</computeroutput>:
9138 Specifies the USB proxy service backend to use. Mandatory.
9139 </para>
9140 </listitem>
9141
9142 <listitem>
9143 <para>
9144 <computeroutput> --address &lt;address&gt;</computeroutput>:
9145 Specifies the backend specific address. Mandatory.
9146 </para>
9147 </listitem>
9148
9149 </itemizedlist>
9150
9151 <para>
9152 The following command removes a USB device.
9153 </para>
9154
9155<screen>VBoxManage usbdevsource remove &lt;source name&gt;
9156 </screen>
9157
9158 <para>
9159 Where the command line options are as follows:
9160 </para>
9161
9162 <itemizedlist>
9163
9164 <listitem>
9165 <para>
9166 <computeroutput>&lt;source name&gt;</computeroutput>:
9167 Specifies the ID of the source USB device to be removed.
9168 Mandatory.
9169 </para>
9170 </listitem>
9171
9172 </itemizedlist>
9173
9174 </sect1>
9175
9176 <xi:include href="user_man_VBoxManage-mediumio.xml" xpointer="element(/1)" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" />
9177
9178 <xi:include href="user_man_VBoxManage-debugvm.xml" xpointer="element(/1)" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" />
9179
9180 <xi:include href="user_man_VBoxManage-extpack.xml" xpointer="element(/1)" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" />
9181
9182 <xi:include href="user_man_VBoxManage-unattended.xml" xpointer="element(/1)" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" />
9183
9184 <xi:include href="user_man_VBoxManage-snapshot.xml" xpointer="element(/1)" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" />
9185
9186 <xi:include href="user_man_VBoxManage-cloudprofile.xml" xpointer="element(/1)" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" />
9187
9188 <xi:include href="user_man_VBoxManage-cloudlist.xml" xpointer="element(/1)" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" />
9189
9190</chapter>
Note: See TracBrowser for help on using the repository browser.

© 2024 Oracle Support Privacy / Do Not Sell My Info Terms of Use Trademark Policy Automated Access Etiquette